Home

TECDIS Manual EN rev 3_23

1. 4 At the bottom of the Bearing list window buttons is provided with functions necessary to amend the status of bearing lines 1 select All lines 2 select No lines 3 delete the selected lines 4 Save EP calculate and display the estimated position of 2 and 3 pos ition lines 5 export the selected lines 6 move lines individually ReAnchor when this command is activated the cursor must be positioned over the anchor point or over the arrowhead of the bearing line and then left click to retreive it The bearing line now follows the cursor movement without changing the angle parallel shift and can be placed by clicking again the left mouse button New bearing lines can be added to the Bearing list by enabling Bearing EBL VRM left click icon form the Main Toolbar if the function is not activated To save a bearing line click on the middle mouse button Then the bearing line appearance changes from dashed to solid line fig 5 96 placed bearing lines in bold solid brown This modification indicate that the bearing line is saved and is visibile as long as Bearing list window is activ Here the bearing line s data and status can be modified This process can be repeated as many times as desired A B C D E F G H J K 1 Fromlat Fromlon Tolat To lon Date Time LOP Type Brg Dist mtr Note 2 58 903405 010 571202 58 973400 010 641603 18 05 2012 12 12 52 0 1 027 4 8787 Peiling 3 59
2. gso gt ET Noth LO Yanem Ke Rogalgag IL o a E j E Sefina Grimeton M E T l FA Br mur ia Tan Eet muang Cai lin Eee farms Gisloyshammer JY A In the NAVTEX window you can select which data to display NavtexDig Jeloeya 11 04 12 01 518 Jeloeya 11 04 12 02 518 290958 UTC MAR 12 ODANISH NAV WARN 121 12 OLIMFIORD AALBO2 ODANISH NAV WARN 121 12 OLIIMFIORD AALBORG HARBOUR OTHE RAILWAY BRID 1191100 UTG MAR 12 ODANISH NAV WARN 115 12 O LIIMFIORD S2 ODANISH NAV WARN 115 12 O LIIMFIORD SAELHUNDEHOLM CHANNEL SE OREDUCED Jeloeya 11 04 12 01 518 1290958 UTC MAR 12 ODANISH NAV WARN 121 12 OLIIMFIORD AALBO2 ODANISH NAV WARN 121 12 OLIMFIORD AALBORG HARBOUR OTHE RAILWAY BRID B27 Norway Rogaland 24 02 15 20 518 240906 UTC FEB 12 OLGT ONORWEGIAN GALE WARNING NO 184 20LET ONORWEGIAN GALE WARNING NO 184 C FISHER AND FORTIES COTODAY FRII 63 LB28 Norway Rogaland 24 02 15 00 518 211156 UTC FEB 12 OLGT ONORWEGIAN GALE WARNING NO 135 2 OLGT ONORWEGIAN GALE WARNING NO 185 TORUNGEN AANA SIRA OTODAY FRID Botes Norway Rogaland 24 02 18 19 518 211166 UTC FEB 12 OLGT ONORWEGIAN GALE WARNING NO 185 2 OLGT CINORWEGIAN GALE WARNING NO 185 C TORUNGEN AANA SIRA DTODAY FRID sr C New C 66 hr All Message types In the field at the top left you select the message types for display Nav Navigation warnings Met Meteor
3. A clear warning is displayed onthe Text other screen to show that the payment 63 gee seed Ao Deep soundings mode for the chart opening is SN P Al depth contours Ji anger symbo active L f Cables and pipes ie Bottom type A route check can now be wi Grid lines C Lights charact performed and all hazards precau gte cursor info tions from the charts will be s oe ore displayed The route can also be L Small craft info adjusted manually using the charts Base 1 238 2 862 NT1 pao When route check is performed the payment mode is disabled either by clicking the Checkout button Dynamic Payment Active Alerts Flo 2 Show again or by removing the TECDIS Service Key 178 Chapter 6 Chart installation and maintenance 6 6 IHO Chart library The Chart library selection in the Chart Utilities opens a chart library window displaying an overview of installed chart databases in the TECDIS computer 26 05 14 09 08 M Hide Cursor 57 42116 N Pos 009 54 737 E BRG 1 192 7 82 1 NM iDP m Tide VA wlprift O 5kn 192 PA N ng 3 dy ot Lay W N N 5 X Chart Boundaries F Overview A ie Ee ser MT B Bakla EE T World 5
4. Appendix B Optional add ons e Rel Dir when selected and the timeline is in Route mode the directional arrows in the timeline graph changes to show the direction of the planned vessel course at the time In the selection field the numerical value of the relative wind dir ection with true value of wind speed is displayed e Periods when selected wave period is also displayed along with wave graphs Wave period is expressed in seconds s 7 By pressing the Arrow button in the upper left corner of the selec tion box the graph will expand to fill the entire weather window Press the Arrow button again to go back to normal 263 B 2 Radar overlay TECDIS can be configured to show the RADAR overlay elaborated by Furuno FAR 2107 2807 RADAR series When RADAR overlay is enabled it can be activated from the Main toolbar by clicking on this icon or the F7 key Day JNorth gt sTo bo nnn ix Ed ET E D T Hide Ad ki EC Eada Access to the configuration and settings of RADAR overlay is provided in the following way 1 Press the Menu button Kartrutiner 2 Select the Setup menu tab Kartrutiner 3 Open the dropdown menu Chart Utilities Karthibliotek 4 Select Radar overlay setup Manuelle kartrettelser B C Map kart oppdatering A new Radar overlay correction window sjekk kartlisenser along with a sliding controller appear on the screen B 2 1 Radar overlay correction In this wi
5. C MAP provides official data in SENC format in accordance with the IHO amendment two paragraph 3 3 of S 52 and a new Technical Resolution A3 11 adopted by the IHO s 16th International Hydrographic Conference C MAP CM 93 3 SENC distribution system was also type approved by the Norwegian VERITAS DNV in March 2003 as required by the IHO The distribution system includes Real Time Updating infrastructure that allows users of this system to download chart corrections directly online ENC data from states countries that still have not approved the distri bution of data in the SENC format are distributed in the S 63 format and converted on board Mi Chapter 1 TECDIS at a glance 1 3 Positions Chart Datum The Chart Datum is a mathematical model used by the chart producer to adapt the earth s surface curvature In the TECDIS system position reference always use the datum with refer ences to the World Geodetic System 1984 WGS84 This format is considered the most accurate chart datum available All charts and chart objects in TECDIS are shown in the World Geodetic System 1984 WGS 84 and all the inputs for position data to TECDIS GPS must use this datum Any translation recalculation can easily be made with tools for Maritime calculations All sensor inputs with position references must use the WGS 84 format 27 This blank page is automatically inserted where appropriate to ensure that new
6. Deep Deep Not defined All areas in the chart shallower than the safe depth are marked in blue and the contour is highlighted All areas outside the depth contour for safe depth is considered safe waters by TECDIS An anti grounding alert will sound if the vessel safety zone crosses the depth contour for safe depth All areas in the chart that are shal lower than the shallow depth are marked in dark blue Shallow depth can be used to separate shoals within the safe depth zone All areas in the chart that are shal lower than the deep depth are All areas in the chart that are deeper than the deep setting Marked ina lighter gray blue color Setup Chart Ship Data Log Safe his Safe dpt Shallow Deep Ta 2 10 J Check time Angle ns 25 j Auto Safe Hazards Jon recommended 1 l Camera control Alarm I Standby Mode T New WP CTS Non ENC dangers marked in a light grey blue color e The value of the Safe Depth field can be set manually but now lower than the Draught Max or Safe Depth Min values in TECDIS Setup e Deep and shallow can be changed freely 206 When you start TECDIS the system automatically checks for the set Draught Max and Safe Depth Min values If either of these values are higher than the Safe Depth setting in the Safe menu that Safe Depth value will be changed to the highest value In charts without the selected safe depth contour the
7. GE GEGEE 156 BONGA AN EED NENG EN EE GALA EE EG GO AR GE OE AA ED Ee EE he 157 6 3 1 T amp P for charts from Jeppesen EE GEGEE EE GE 158 BI AO EAT EE EE DE DE 159 sis L kor el AA 159 6 3 2 2 Remove AlO notices ooo ccc ES Se Ee RE Aa aaa 159 6 3 2 3 AlO types and display EE SG GE Ge 160 6 3 2 4 Review AlO information using AlO viewer EE ccc ccccccccccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeees 161 PANO AA cars EE EE SDA UI GO Ee Sah ete ER EG EE DE ae ee EE N 162 OUE VERSTE SEE N AE RE SE GE EG ED EE Oe EG raaa AE RE N bn ace EE tee Ge 162 Detailed view GES SS GE GE GE EG GE EE SG ee 162 AIO S USE Es cen DE EE ER ease N DE GE GE EE GE atin oe EE EE GE Ee GE 162 6 3 2 5 AIO Options panel EER SEE SE GO ES GE EG EE GE N EO EE OG EE DER EE SOND EER 163 6 3 3 Manual chart corrections EES SG GE GE GE GE SG ee 163 6 3 3 1 Display of manual chart corrections in the chart VIEW SS ee 164 6 3 3 2 Enter manual chart corrections ESE SES SG SS GES SG SG ES Ee ee 165 6 3 3 3 Change the correction EES ESEG cece cece eeceeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeetees 166 6 3 3 4 Delete chart corrections ESEG cece cece cece eee aaaea aaao oaaae aana 167 6 3 AUpdate O EE EE RE SS ES Re aan E abound si Ga a ER Ng ALA LE 168 6 4 Delete chart databases SESSE SS SS SG EG EG GE GE SG Se ee 170 oie k Si aa RE EO OE EA EE OE OE 171 6 5 1 View your chart licenses in the TECDIS program 171 6 5 2 Chart licenses Jeppesen SENC
8. If you move the pointer to a corner in the chart view you will be able to pan diagonally in the chart Set chart center visually To move a point in the chart view to the centre of the chart view you move the pointer to that point and click the middle mouse button Set chart center enter position Enter position The chart center can be moved to a given position by ee 5845 570 N ressing the Pos button in the sensor field in the an 100 Ghart centre _ information panel In the window that appears in the left upper side of RG 58 25 809 N 010 41 211 E the display you enter the desired position in the 100 fields The Ins button on the keyboard will also open ul ELR this window Tab NSEW Left Right You can enter the position in either degrees minutes 7 8 3 Bksp and decimals or in degrees minutes and seconds To 4 5 6 switch between these mode you press the button to 1 2 3 NG Enter the far left of the position window To show an on 0 screen keyboard press the downward pointing arrow to the right in the window 43 When you are finished entering the desired chart 58 45 570 N 009 45 493 E center position you press the Chart center button to 1100 Chart centre ik pan the chart view to that position and the position is indicated in the chart This function is also very useful Tah n5Ew Left Riot when placing objects sym
9. Logg Safe Ais Setup Kart Bat Data Tekst standard Aktive ledsectorer L Smabat info si 2 852 INT1 ke 20120426 Oslo Kiel WP ende planlagt fart DIG 394 NM ETA 02 19 19 To WOP 2 GIS 1629 155 1 DIG 20 5 NM TTG 2hr 02 mm XTE 0 005 AP mode Offline Wack Headin varsel fi o 3 Vis 2 3 5 The main toolbar At the top of the screen you find the main toolbar which gives access to main system functions This section contains a brief description of the different functions sor Dag Nord STO Chart scales Ps 2000 Stop TECDIS Monitor colour Chart orientation STD S52 AUTO chart present A j ation USER configured chart presentation Conning and anchorwatch Weather overlay Radar overlay Video switching Zoom in Chart scale Zoom out Show overview chart 40 Auto chart repos itioning Query cursor EBL VRM Bearing Show ARPA targets Show AIS targets MOB symbol event marker Route planner Past Track Symbols Maritime cal culations LOP NAVTEX Settings menu a The chart view In this chapter we will look closer at how charts are presented in TECDIS and how you move around in the charts 3 1 Moving around in the chart EG 43 3 1 1 Chart panning ESEG aaa aa aa Laa LaLa aLaaa aaan 43 3 1 2 Set chart center visually SS GE EE 43 3 1 3 Set chart center enter position
10. activates Auto mode Saves a time marker on the F9 ke past track record d Opens the route planning tool r Show hide conning screen 5 Same functionality as the Enter key on the supplied keyboard Also emulates left mouse button for the cursor position Opens the NMEA data status window Closes any open window Recentre the chart view to own vessel position and activate Auto mode SHIFT toggles between upper case and lower case letters HELP Shows object information about the object in the cursor position al Opens the settings menu a Adjust the chart scale keys Places a MOB marker in the current position own vessel is 4 and F10 in Saves an event marker in and F12 own vessel position Show information for selected ARPA or AIS target Adjust transparency of readar overlay 283 This blank page is automatically inserted where appropriate to ensure that new Chapters begin on a recto page In this section you will find procedures and answers to common questions If there is a procedure you want us to add please contact us at support telko no C 1Why isn t my route activated 287 C 2The quickest way to make a route quick route ______ 288 C 3How do keep my TECDIS units up to date 2222222 289 C 4How do I turn on T amp P and AlO EE SES GE eee 290 C 4 1ENC integrated T amp P notices cece cece cece cee ceeeees 290 C 4 2Jeppesen T a
11. will move automatically if the auto function is not activated 93 Chapter 4 Navigation 4 3 EBL VRM Bearing TECDIS has a bearing function electronic bearing line that allows you to make bearings both from the vessel position and from any point in the chart When the bearing is anchored to the vessel it will follow the vessel movements dynamically The bearing tool is activated form the main toolbar 4 3 1 Bearing functions The bearing tool has the following functions e Bearing from own and selected position in the chart e Bearing slit with all saved bearings and place lines e Cursor information for the bearing with distance and direction e Two bearing modes relative and true e Temporary quick route route with route monitoring in three clicks 4 3 2 General about EBL VRM operation ETA 18 12 26 05 14 18 00 M Hide GPS 59 02 057 N 4 sats 010 29 004 E COG 000 0 HDG 000 5 SOG 10 0 kn STW 10 x kn Cursor E 106 N Pos 7 010 34 219 E 058 8 198m Ee T ms 180 slprift 0 5 kn 190 Bearing and range information is displayed in the cursor info field The measure unit for the distance is indicated in the lower right corner of the info field and it can be switched between nautical miles NM and meters m by pressing it 94 4 3 3 When the anchor point of the bearing is locked on to own vessel position ETA is displayed wit
12. SA Messafe WOES EO RENE E BE NR ER OGE GE RS GE SEE AE EO EG EE De Oe SA Ee DE ER EG ee 133 5 8 2 Radio Ehaniiels 4 60 saat aan EE DE lap dona dosa aa EE EE DE EE GE DE EE Ng 134 6 83 Older MES IBES AA DE 134 SBA SOW INCSS AC CS EE AE E E ese E EEE EEEE 134 Chapter 6 Chart installation and maintenance EE GE aaron roan 135 6 1 Installing chart databases EE EG cece cece cece ceteececeeeececeeeeetttecceceeeeeeeeesees 137 6 1 1 Quick installation with Jeppesen SENC charts ESEG EG e cece ececcecceccececccceeeeeeeees 137 6 1 2 Quick installation with Navtor Navstick 2 ZH cece cece cece ccc ce ccc ec Gee 139 6 1 3 Quick installation with Neptune from Nautisk Forlag Uu 141 6 1 4 Create the User Permit file SS ESEG SS SG ccc EG SG GE EG Ge ee ei 143 6 1 4 1 View your User Permit EES SEGE Gie 144 6 1 5 Standard chart installation with S63 Chart Loader ES SG SG GE ei 145 SLS FAddINE CEILPE lie ss EDE N SEE De tate Se EE EE ance 145 6 15 22 Deleting Cell Permits uan sac akon oe EE GE aa IG Ge ee ie ER basa a att tg 147 OESS Ae fa AA AN 147 6 1 5 4 Review of the chart loadinglog eee 150 6 1 5 5 Considering authenticity information 2 0 0 0 GE SG GE ee 151 6 2 Updating chart databases GEGEE GEE 154 6 2 1 Updating charts Jeppesen SENC elec cece cece cece eee annoa aooaa aaa naonao annona n 154 6 2 2 Updating charts S63 Chart Loader
13. Status funder way sailing Destination KJEL 7 ETA 2108 12 34 Hzd carge 7 Draught 4 0 Persons Cancel Set ala 3 4 5 6 7 el el ol Bksp lawer tly JO P jal 8 D F 6 walle ena Jz x o vl B mj ma Home oe tft up on Rat new information in the fields and press the Set button Values that are changed will appear in red writing Notice that earlier saved Destination values are available in the dropdown menu for easy and quick selection Draught values larger than 25 5 meters will be reset to 25 5 meters The on screen keyboard at the bottom of the window can be used as an alternative to the regular physical keyboard for data input To finish and closing the window without making changes press Cancel 126 Chapter 5 Other functions 5 4 3 AIS Broadcast messages 5 4 4 To send an AIS broadcast message message to MEEN all vessels within VHF range or to review IHT S Y Elefteria BRG 1518 Pos 59 00 739 N recieved broadcast messages open Own ship DIST Or 010 47 209 E ASI data se above and press the Message tee Bik Pk Ee button m Aktivere _lagre Slette M CPA Melding AIS OK This will open the broadcast message window where received messages can be selected for viewing in the dropdown list at the top of the window Message to 259153000 z A new message is written by pressing the New Typ
14. TECDIS USER MANUAL VER 3 23 ENGLISH This blank page is automatically inserted where appropriate to ensure that new Chapters begin on a recto page Table of contents ge dele ies io EER EE OE EE EO OE EER OE RO EE EE ER ON 17 Navigating the user manual 17 TOONS EA RE OR EE EE AA 17 HEID did SUDDOIE se RE IE EDE GO as aah EE EE ED CL Do de UB ER as 18 ALALA o a CO 19 Compliance with Current Standards occ cece cece ccc ccc EE 20 Version ey a kand MENET EE SE eS DE ae ES nee et eo Pree PAR 20 VERSIONS AA 20 Chapter 1 TECDIS at a glance GEGEE 21 lS EC DIS SYS teM ESE OD cae a esa ass GP DE EE AE OE N GER EE an Ge Se Ee Ge Ee 23 12 Eharts AA 25 1 2 1 About Chart Databases and Simplified ENC Distribution SEGE EG GEGEE Gee 26 1 3 Positions Chart Datum si ENE ES EE LUNA SS GE EG EE EE GE ee EG Ee 27 Chapter 2 The basics EE arnt SG ese cae GE EG EG GE EG DE N aig 29 2 1 Keyboard and trackball mouse 02 0 c occ cence cence eee cence cece eect LLDD eee aao Laana 31 2 IV Viele Oe WMO AP 31 2 Ie ea AS EE RE EE EE ER ee AE ee De EE AG EE GE ie 31 pe Wes ha AA AA 33 2 2 Navigating menus and tools U GEGEE 34 FP ASE are ANING os RE ED SE EE SE Ee DE sto eee eter 34 2 2 2 Z00mMing in the chart ES Ge Ge SR LLALLA LLALLA ER ot kia nine Baka klng 34 22 3 SE AA 34 2 2 A Actvatinge FUNCHONS TOONS 20222261634 ER EE DR EE GE pin EG SG ERGE a ad nhs as NGANGA haus 34 2 2 5 Dropdewirments EE DE
15. TELchart El P 192 168 1 103 a This function allows automatic route transfer to TECDIS no 2 and add the possibility to transfer data objects past track lines routes to the other units Radar use true When this checkbox is marked it is assumed that EBL reference bearings lines received from the radar s are true referenced If this option is not marked TECDIS will z Radar use true EBL reference perform the necessa ry adjustments Arpa is conning When this checkbox is marked it is assumed that referenced target information from Arpa radar is already adjusted to the navigator position M Arpa is conning referenced If itis not marked TECDIS will perform the necessary adjustments Monitor inch diagonal is the monitor screen size in Monitor size inches measured diagonally main menu Backward gyro 1802 this flips the heading values given by the gyro 180 degrees 228 m Monitor size main menu 24 sidebar 848 7 l backward ayro 180 M Video toggle VGA T Alternative display comm Alarm Allow Standby Mode T Alarm if HOTI HDT2 2 6 Alarm M Remote silence only Allow route activ ation entry lane Allow route activation entry lane Erase Secondary past track Erase Secondary past track Name Name SS DEMINI MMSI MMSI 259985000 Appendix A TECDIS Setup In the Main menu dropdown list you can select where you want to place the main toolbar T
16. There is a problem with C Map System files in the installation Contact TECDIS service support for assistance There is a problem with C Map System files in the installation Contact TECDIS service support for assistance There is a problem with C Map System files in the installation or with the license in the System ID TELKO eT codeplug Contact TECDIS support for assistance There is a problem with C Map System files in the installation or with the license in the System ID TELKO eT codeplug Contact TECDIS support for assistance The Weather data file is missing from the system The Weather data file has become corrupted or is not provided by Jeppesen Marine The system cannot access the Weather data file The Weather data file does not appear to be licensed to this system The Cyclone data file is missing from the system The Cyclone data file has become corrupted or is not provided by Jeppesen Marine The Cyclone data file has become corrupted or is not provided by Jeppesen Marine The Cyclone data file has become corrupted or is not provided by Jeppesen Marine The system can not access the Cyclone data file The Cyclone data file does not appear to be licensed to this system The Import feature can only load files with a grb or xml file extension Import of a file with another extension was 309 attempted 310 Furuno Norway Furuno Norway is the worldwide distri
17. Types 7 Hijack 7 Kidnapping 3 7 Armed robbery 7 Armed assault 7 Attempted attack Attempted boarding 7 Theft 7 Suspicious approach In the Piracy Information window it is possible to set criteria for the type of piracy data to show in the chart and how the data is shown Time Period The Time Period field contains three options for time limiting the viewing of piracy data The All choice is selected when all the data is to be displayed regard less of when the incident occurred The choice Latest 12 weeks shows all cases in the last 12 weeks or the number of weeks that is set with the up down buttons to the right The last option for the Time Period field allows to select all pirate data within a calendar month selected with the up down buttons to the right Incident types The Incident Types field and the associated Select None button has options for displaying these piracy data types Hijack and Kidnap indicated with a red symbol Armed robbery and Armed assault indicated with an orange symbol Attempted attack and Attempted boarding indicated with a blue symbol Theft and Suspicious approach indicated with a green symbol 267 e All cases from last week are highlighted in black color no matter piracy data type By Clicking on a pirate symbol a red ring is inserted around the piracy symbol and the Piracy Information window is extended with additional information about the sel
18. 4 Manual chart corrections ENC integrated T amp P notices ENCintegrated T amp P notices is offered by more and more hydrographic offices This option integrates the T amp P notices to the ENC charts and every time you upgrade your charts the T amp P notices are updates as well The status of implementation for different flag states can be seen at https www primar org web 10180 60 Even with ENCintegrated T amp P notices it is often wanted by inspectors that the navigator has a conscious relationship with Notices to Mariners and T amp P in the charts This is not possible with ENC integrated T amp P as these are automatically controlled by the chart core of the system i To display consciousness with regards to T amp P inspectors often require expect navigators to use another method for handling chart corrections from Notice to Navigators Jeppesen T amp P Jeppesen T amp P is an optional service in TECDIS To acquire Jeppesen T amp P contact Jeppesen Marine at info marine jeppesen com Jeppesen T amp P requires Jeppesen Professional Jeppesen ENC or JeppesenPrimar Jeppesen T amp P display T amp P notices in a separate datalayer in TECDIS This datalayer can be switched on and off whenever wanted by the navigator This is done in the following way 290 Appendix C Frequently asked questions Press the Menu button to wo mr open the menu tabs Log Safe Ais star Ship Data laers Layers 2 Se
19. 65 4 1 3 1 Chapter 4 Navigation How to change the chart view during route drawing To move the chart view during waypoint placing use the middle mouse button to recenter the chart to the position where the cursor is Altern atively you can move the cursor to the chart view edges and press the left 173 mouse button when the cursor changes form to an arrow 4 1 3 2 Chart scale is changed in the main toolbar alternatively by using the scroll wheel if available Navigating the charts can with great benefit also be done by using the scale shortcuts on the keyboard see 3 3 Chart scale see page 46 How to separate a new route from existing routes in the chart view When you are drawing a new route or modifying an existing all other existing routes are shown in the chart view as well but in grey If active lead sectors are turned on in the Chart menu tab lead sectors are shown by the cursor position elg navn id ton inavn id test rute 1 tjome 1 0 eI The selected route is marked by a red line with directional arrows Each waypoint is shown on that red line with a circle and a waypoint number W1 2 etc On the line between waypoints you can select to have planned course and speed displayed O EE 4 1 3 3 Route check When the last waypoint in the route is set the route will automatically be checked for dangers The lines of the voyage corridor has different colou
20. Na LIL Temperature Celsius Pressure hPa ER EEN ee ee N ee ee 03 07 2012 01 00 00 18 07 2012 01 00 00 Current Speed M s Heights Meters 7 Vir Saving BJ atarmer Joviioner cyclone wind Mms 7 Rain Snow Milmeters Detailed Wind Arrows Knots Pressing the Unit Button for weather window you can specify the preferred units of measurement for e Temperature e Velocity of the current e Cyclone Wind e Wind Speed e Pressure e Heights Meteorological tides e Rain Snow e Detailed Wind Arrows Knots Press Unit Button again to close the selection window units The graphical presentation for the display of wind data varies with the unit of measure chosen For all other units of measurement than Knots it is only the wind arrow length that describes the wind speed When Knots is selected all the wind arrows are the same length but they have indicators of wind speed as well With the Detailed Wind Arrows Knots checkbox you can select to display wind arrows associated with the Knots selection even though another measure is chosen 257 B 1 10 Treatment of downloaded weather KIKI hao7 2012 foa3802 2 Na oor start Date Days Forecast Model Z ss pu 03 07 2012 0 Global ECMWF 25 km load 03 07 2012 01 00 00 18 07 2012 01 00 00 Delete Vrye ET Haar 8 syktoner OER Details yer dem Else o Current Details 27 06 2012 3 Global ECMWE 150 km Er 27 06 201
21. Ng PUTA C Local i Dato gt Hoyeste Laveste Tid Tidevann GMT 29 sep 2011 17 45 15 45 m 00 06 034m 02 15 3 44 m The time can either be shown in GMT or in local standard time for the forecast point Tides for other dates may also be selected for display By placing the cursor on the curve in graphic presentation the corresponding time and tide levels are displayed with green numeric values in the lower right part of the notification window 130 5 6 2 5 6 3 Chapter 5 Other functions As long as a tide notification window is opened in the chart the other near forecast points are marked in the chart with a yellow symbol Left click on the symbol to expose the tide data from that particular forecast point Tidal current semmono occ c 3B lll ll LA NAL LAP lI IN AY a My Oe C Local lt Dato gt Tid Direction Speed BMI 28 sep 2011 bb 10 15 245 162 kn In addition as long as the tidal window is shown in the chart view yellow tidal current indicator arrows will be displayed These arrows reflect the present direction and speed of the tidal current By placing the cursor over one of these arrows a tidal power indicator window opens that works in the same way as the tidal notification window Tidal forecast points for ebb and flow In TECDIS it is also possible to control when the tide changes direction through forecast points for ebb and flow
22. Specification Chart Installation Miso Licensing Track Control m TECDIS TELchart License Show edit license m C Map License System ID Databases def Telko 55003 ENG Get expired licenses East Asia Hydrographic Commission EAHC Japan Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department JHOD Hydrographic Department Maritime and Port Authority MPA Singapore a License string Add License Licenses list Add Licenses from file License order TECDIS uses eToken codeplugs from Jeppesen as the system ID Without the correct eToken connected to your unit TECDIS will not start A 6 1 System licenses TELcahrt License Information about your system licenses such as what options are activated for your TECDIS unit can be found by pressing the Show Edit license button TEGDIS TELchart License A TELeode5 w l eT C TELKO A S Standard version Chart server engine Name seek Seismic streamers Codeplug 55003 5 6 TFFhOhel Night Watch Optical bearing interface License Ver Subver Feature Feature Weather display and routing Dynamic objects Enter password for licensetype and click Program a Radar overlay TrackControl This information includes licenses number and version information and a list of installed add ons The add ons are displayed in blue writing in the right field 233 A 6 1 1 Activating add ons To acti
23. by IHO confirmed with trusted certi ficate If the ENCs are not properly signed the chart CS is not valid according to the S63 standard specification If ENCs are signed and this is confirmed with a certificate included on the media This only confirms that the signature is technically in order Since the certificate is included with the data the origin of the data are not independ ently confirmed If the ENCs are signed by the provider and this is confirmed with a preinstalled certificate the authenticity of the data is independently confirmed and the data can be trusted If the ENCs are signed by IHO and this is confirmed with a preinstalled certificate the authenticity of the data is independently confirmed and the data can be trusted Line 2 Does the chart CD contain a Data Server Certificate issued by the 5 lt 0 0 Line 3 0 1 Line 4 0 0 1 Line 5 1 chart provider Data Server certi The Data Server certificate is not included on ficate is not the chart media and authenticity has to be provided assessed manually Data Server certi ficate is provided but does not match any trusted certi ficates Et Data Server sertifikat er inkludert pa kart CD en men det er ikke identisk med et av de forhandsinstallerte og klarerte sertifikater Ask you chart provider for a valid certificate and install this as described in chapter 6 9 7 Da
24. gt max allowed WOL distance x 0 01 NM r Default values new route f ZE Warning 1min Alarm 30 sec WP warning and alarm time 2 min speed 12 speed kn lane x 0 01 NM i Alarm limit difference primary and secondary heading 1 turn radius x 0 1NM 1 Alarm limit difference primary and secondary position x 0 01 NM Use common heading and log sensors for TECDIS primary input and autopilot The Track Control tab is available only when Track Control is added to the TECDIS License For installation and configuration of autopilots please see the install ation manuals from the manufacturer Note The autopilot and TECDIS has to be connected to and configured with the same course and speed sensors A 7 1 The autopilot field The options of the autopilot field reflect which autopilots can be connected to TECDIS The following autopilots are available e Ansch tz NP2025 e EMRI SEM200 FAP 2000 239 A 7 2 A 7 3 A 7 4 The Startin Requirements field The values of the Starting Requirements field denotes which conditions has to be met before Track Control Mode can be activated max course deviation sets the maximum number of degrees the vessels COG can deviate from the planned COG max lane deviation sets the maximum distance from the vessels position to the active route leg expressed as x times the width of the route leg For eksempel hvis ruteleggens bredde for den planlagte rut
25. ing on page 94 ere ee 1 Dev Deviation from course 89 4 2 2 4 2 3 4 2 4 Chapter 4 Navigation Larger CTS values If the size of the CTS values needs to be enlarged this is achieved by clicking the field they are in with the cursor To WOP 2 cs 190 1 ROT AB m CTS 230 me Amin3As ATE 0 005 NM In addition the Rate Of Turn ROT is displayed while the graphic repres entation of the current heading is removed with only the XTE X cross Track Error value is presented Route name text field In the route name text field either waypoint text or routename is displayed with the following priority 1 Text for next waypoint Tekst for WP8 2 Text for ETA waypoint Tekst for WP5 3 Route name Tekst for Rutenavn 4 Route ID 506530008 Calculation of the voyage duration There are two ways in which you can calculate ETA for the route Planned Planned speed uses the speed values listed in the route speed planner Present speed calculates ETA from the actual speed the vessel is sailing with when the calculation happens The exception is if a soeed value listed in the route planner is locked by the navigator Then the system will calculate the ETA based on a combination of current speed and planned speed Locked route leg speeds are shown with black text in the speed column in the route planner Present speed 90 The navigation information window shows ETA DTG either for
26. it can be placed in the desired position in the chart with a mouse left click The distance from the route line to the index line is presented in NM at the center of the index line An overview of which route legs that have index lines is found on the route planner where route legs with index lines are marked with IX in the text field 6 0kn 0 05 NM 0 10NM_ tandai o RG r z TE paa TE E m Mala ES _2 6NM_ EE Ettin 0 05 z 59 06 602 N 010 39 098 E 0 9NM 229 0 5 0kn 0 05NM 1010 NM 0 05 e oe Ene AE NNC M nan n7 TOET F la Onna AA To le N kr ln NE RIKA In 40 MIKA Felt 86 4 1 17 1 Change index line length The end of each Index Line is marked with a square symbol A left click on one of these square symbol enables the extension shortening of Index Line Lock the Index Line in to position by left clicking again The distance from route to Index Line is given in NM at the Index Line middle point 4 1 17 2 Deleting and restoring index lines To delete an index line you simply right click with the cursor placed on an end point of the index line To undo last deletion and restoring the last deleted line is achieved by double clicking the route leg line that indexline belongs to 4 1 18 Display sight lines Sight lines are shown straight ahead of the vessel and at 45 and 90 degree angles from the ship bow when you are placing waypoints in the chart The sight lines are also available af
27. menu Installation of Camera control in TECDIS Setup is required a CAM symbol is shown at the end of a 0 5 NM long vector originating in the Conning position The operator can control the camera by placing the cursor over the CAM symbol and right click The appearance of the CAM symbol changes ant it is now highlighted It will now follow the cursor movements in the chart and the camera unit itself will be moved 208 The camera can now be locked at a fixed position in the charts such as to a reef or a light by placing the CAM symbol in the desired position and right clicking In addition the CAM symbol can be placed over an ARPA or AIS target and will then both lock on to and follow the movements of the target 7 7 5 Alarm The operator can choose some of the alarm functions See chapter 4 5 Notifications and alarms see page 99 for a more detailed descriptioin of the alarm system Function name Description This mode is only available if made so by a service technician When this option is selected no Standby mode audible alarms will be triggered It is displayed with a large warning notice in the bottom right part of the charts When the vessel is approaching a new waypoint WP New WP CTS on active sailing route an alarm is triggered when the wheelover line is crossed When ENC charts are available Anti grounding System and Route Check will always verify ENC data By selec
28. new values directly into the list Position is given in degrees and decimal minutes Delete lines and areas The Delete feature is enabled by clicking Z amp on the Delete button The button will now be activated Delete custom lines spaces by clicking on the left mouse button with the cursor over the line symbol or on the center of circular areas Exit delete mode by clicking OK or right mouse button Edit line change color modify move lines and areas This E feature is only available for multipoint lines and areas Enable the modify move mode by pressing the Edit line change color button The button will now be activated and several operations can be performed to move modify a corner left click on the corner Move it to the new location and left click once again to anchor it to add a new corner to a straight line left click on a straight line Move it in the desired location and left click to anchor it to delete a corner right click the point to delete OK button to exit the mode Ace new line area you can insert the following lines areas KIISE e Lines e Circular areas e Multi point areas e Rectangular areas The selected function will be displayed with a light background when activated Simple lines circular and rectangular areas extent size are set in by another click on the left mouse button For multi point lines or areas each click of the left mouse button will place a new g
29. peared from the system For further description of AIS and ARPA function ality see see ARPA and radar targets on page 122Asee AIS operation on page 124AIS Alle Chapter 7 System settings 7 9 Monitor calibration All information in an electronic chart system has to be clearly visible To ensure this the monitor has to be adjusted to display correct colours This especially important for night view mode when the monitor luminance is reduced Remember to test colours with dusk and night modes not only day mode ECDIS test images for monitor calibration is placed in the IHO present ation library Open the library by pressing Control Alt Shift T and navigate to the test images by pressing A B C D E or T keys on the keyboard 7 9 1 Controlling the monitor contrast TECDIS monitors are not to be adjusted with the monitor keys when used with an ECDIS system All contrast and luminance settings are to be performed from the TECDIS through the serial connection to the monitor Control the monitor contrast and luminance by opening test image E and verify that the grey box is visible Background lumination is now controllable with a sliding controller that appears below the day dusk night dropdown field in the main toolbar This controller gives a green calibrated indicator at different luminance levels for day dusk night Outside the calibrated values a red indicator is shown The monitor backlight setting
30. 022440 010 686358 59 033847 010 764302 18 05 2012 12 13 34 1 2 0741 4653 Stedlinje uten klokke 4 59 000394 010 930751 58 969764 010 835206 18 05 2012 12 14 11 1 2 238 1 6467 Stedlinje med klokke 5 58 918650 010 541676 58 869900 010 760782 18 05 2012 12 19 57 1 1 113 4 13749 ReAnchored Peiling 6 58 962479 010 590870 58 918568 010 692895 18 05 2012 12 21 16 1 2 129 8 7643 ReAnchored Stedlinje To save data from Bearing list for later use or for transport to another computer use the Export function The Bearing Positions and or the Lines of Position data that will be exported must be selected with a tick in the checkbox Data is exported to the location and under file name which is specified in the Save As window The file format is not selectable it is saved under csv format which is a text file readable in the Excel In the table above such a csv file is illustrated opened in Excel and some formatting are made for easier readability The positions are specified in decimal grades and the time is indicated in the Date and Hour separate columns LOP is indicated either by a 0 or 1 where 0 indicates a Bearing Line while 1 indicates a Line of Position In the Type column the following is set 1 Bearing 2 LOP or a moved bearing 3 NMEA data received from the optical sounding instrument 4 NMEA data received from VHF In the column labeled Brg is indicated the bearing of the line while in the column marked Di
31. 1 3 4 7 1 4 Calculation of time In the Time field information about the start time and end time for the intended voyage is displayed Here you can set one value manually then the second will update itself automatically from the prerequisites of the voyage Time and date values are initially set to the current time and date when you started the calculating tool By entering a value for speed the sailing time is shown in the field below Speed Time and date fields can be adjusted and the time date value that you have set will be adjusted accordingly to show the correct duration of the voyage Datum The Datum field at the bottom of the calculator makes it possible to translate both From and To positions between different datum The positions in the From and To fields will always be set to the datum selected in the Datum field directly below If another datum is selected with the dropdown menu the numeric values for the corresponding position value changes immediately to reflect the changed datum choice Some examples of how Maritime calculations may be used e Calculation of a new and unknown position based on the distance and bearing from a given position Move the chart center to the From position by clicking with the middle mouse button with the cursor over the point on the chart that you want to select as From position or place it in by entering values directly in the fields of Lat and Lon Select RL or GC in the Distan
32. 152 Chapter 6 Chart installation and maintenance kartene og ektheten av kartdata kan ikke bekreftes Authenticity has to be assessed manually files are not present Kartsignaturens sjekksum er ugyldig The signature files might have been manipulated and unreliable Authenticity has to be assessed manually ENC signature 1 file checksums are invalid s1538 6 2 Updating chart databases 6 2 1 Keeping the chart databases updated is the navigators responsibility to ensure safe sailing Contact your chart provider for more information about how often you should update your charts and what chart update services they can provide for you TECDIS offers the following update methods 1 All chart databases can be updated in the S63 Chart Loader 2 Jeppesen SENC ENC Primar and Professional can also be updated directly in the TECDIS program Updating charts Jeppesen SENC With charts from Jeppesen SENC you have access to chart updates directly from the TECDIS program This chart update can be done without setting the TECDIS unit in Service Mode You can also use TECDIS Setup to update charts from Jeppesen To do that follow the same procedure as for the quick installation see 6 1 1 Quick installation with Jeppesen SENC charts see page 137 There you use the Update function Procedure for updating charts from Jeppesen is as follows 1 Inthe TECDIS program open the Setup menu and select C Map cha
33. 43 3 2 Automatic Chart Centering ESEG GEES Gee 45 AA EL AA ere ee 46 3 3 1 Chart zooming automatic scaling 0 22 eee eee 46 3 3 2 Chart zooming with manual scaling 2222222222 47 3 3 3 Automatic zooming during route sailing 47 3 3 4 Zooming without changing chart scale 47 3 3 5 NB Overscale and underscale ccc cee cece cece eee 48 3 4 Chart symbols IHO Presentation library 49 3 5 Chart presentation EES GEGEE Ge 50 3 5 1 Standard presentation mode STD 50 3 5 2 User defined presentation mode USER 50 3 5 3 Full hazards display 51 3 6 Chart symbols own objects EE a 53 3 6 1 MOB symbol eventmarker 2 22 22 cece eee ee oana 53 3 6 2 Opening the symbol menu 2 2 cece SESSE GEES EG 53 3 6 3 Add new modify or delete symbol objects 55 3 6 4 Add new modify or delete custom lines areas 57 3 7 Chart orientation SS SG e cece eee eeeeeeee 59 AJ s Chapter 3 The chart view 3 1 Moving around in the chart 3 1 1 Chart panning 3 1 2 3 1 3 When you move the pointer to one of the chart view edges it will change shape to a directional arrow By left clicking you will then move the chart view in the arrows direction Alternatively you can pan the chart with the arrow keys on your keyboard
34. Alarm I Rel Dir Custom Cursor Info Cyclone Data Units Timeline Alarms I Periods Timeline window provides a graphical representation of weather forecasts variation over time The function is opened by pressing the Timeline button at the bottom of the Weather window 1 To the left of the timeline window is the selection field where you can select e which weather data to be displayed e label shape and color e Weather data for current position of the cursor at the selec ted time 2 The date chosen for display in your chart is shown with a vertical yel low line in the timeline window 3 By moving the cursor over the time window the weather inform ation that applies to the area that is directly under the cursor to the right of the selection field is displayed Black color is used when weather data are from the graphs and green is used when it s weather data from the cursor position on the chart that is displayed 261 4 By default it is assumed that the vessel starts on a route at the next full hour Check this and adjust the departure time with the con trollers Departure Rt 1 and Departure Rt 2 to correspond most to actually scheduled departure It is only when the departure date is set as correct as possible the weather routing provides a rep resentative picture of what the vessel will experience of weather 5 The settings made in the dropdown to how the timeline presented IS e Chart centre a
35. Chapters begin on a recto page The basics In this chapter we will give you the basics of how TECDIS is used in the following sub chapters 2 1 Keyboard and trackball mouse EE cece ee 31 2 1 1 Trackball mouse EE 31 2 1 2 Keyboard ESEG GE naano annann aa naana annan 31 2 1 3 Other peripherals cece cece eee aana 33 2 2 Navigating menus and tools 34 2 2 1 Chart panning EE e cece c cece cece eeeeeeeee 34 2 2 2 Zooming in the chart 22 c ccc GE ee 34 2 2 3 Set chart center ESE SG e cece cece eee Gee 34 2 2 4 Activating functions tools EE EE GE EG 34 2 2 5 Dropdown menus EES GEE a nnan 35 2 2 6 Popup WiNAOWS SS EG Ge 35 2 3 The TECDIS screen SESSE SG SG SG Gee 36 2 3 1 Parts of the screen ESE SS SG SG GE SS Gee 36 2 3 2 Own vessel position 37 2 3 3 Screen light setting Day dusk night 38 2 3 4 The information panel aoaaa 2 2 eee eeeeeee ee 39 2 3 5 The main toolbar c eee eee cece e eee eee eees 40 Helptext If you do not already know how to use your TECDIS enabling the helptext feature is a useful tip By moving the pointer over any toolbutton or parameter value the system will show an explanatory text on a yellow base 30 Chapter 2 The basics 2 1 Keyboard and 2 1 1 2 1 2 trackball mouse TECDIS can be operated with both keyboard and trackball mouse For most functions you can select w
36. Chart panning down right In numeric mode it is enter Zoom in In numeric mode it is the number 1 AIS DOE a T AEEEIE Zoom out In numeric mode it is the number 3 Set a Man Overboard symbol in the chart where the vessel is positioned The system makes a bearing from the vessel to the MOB symbol To turn off the bearing click the MOB key again Activates Numeric Lock NUM lock Single click to toggle display of e AIS targets 1st click e ARPA 1 targets 2nd click e ARPA 2 targets 3rd click Double click to view AIS list In numeric mode it is a tabulator key TAB Single click to open the route selection tool Double click to switch between activated route 1 and route 2 Single click to open the Query cursor tool Double click to open the position box tool In numeric mode it is backspace Opens the bearing tool In numeric mode it is the number 2 User definable button User definable button 2 6 B 5 3 B 5 4 Appendix B Optional add ons Alarm functionality ALARM When an alarm in TECDIS is activated the LED light for the alarm acknow ledge key will blink continuously until the alarm is viewed and approved either with the trackball or with the alarm acknowledge key When you have acknowledged the alarms but the alarm source is still active the light will continuously shine Navigating your TECDIS with the keypad These are the navigation key on the keypad and they
37. Colours est N SEG DR Ge EG GE Ge 213 184 7 1 Settings menu By clicking the settings menu button on the main toolbar a collection of menu tabs will be displayed in the lower part of the information window There are 7 different menu tabs e Setup e Charts e Ship e Data e Log e Safe e AIS and only one is shown at a a time A menu tab is selected by clicking its tab heading If you want to hide the Settings menu again click once on the Settings menu button on the main toolbar or remove the pointer from the Settings menu area 185 Chapter 7 System settings 7 2 The Setup menu In the Setup menu several generic settings are controlled The Setup menu contains Ship draught Language Time zone adjustment NMEA input status Navigation position offset NMEA inngang status Chart utilities dropdown menu Sette posisjonsavvik Chart library field control which chart data Kartrutiner hi bases are viewed and the version number for Logg Safe Ais Setup Kart Bat Data Qbvpsiente Im 2 Phorsk o100 lt 4 pi MM ee NO ENC 478 the available chart databases Professional 555 labi EE 8 Alarm volume adjustment bar only available when alarm is set to speaker or keyboard in TECDIS Setup 9 Auxilary dropdown menu 10 Scroll wheel zoom 11 Display help text see chapter 1 The dropdown menu chart utilities contains 1 IHO Chart library Manual chart correction
38. EE SE GE DS EG ewes Steen Ee DE ee 248 B 1 3Control of weather subscription licenses EE ee 251 B 1 4Downloading a new weather forecast EE aaa 251 B 1 4 1 About weather models SS cece GE GE Ge ee 251 BLA 2 Download NVINGOW iss EDE AR EE ee a pagano De Ge EE DE EE De 252 B 1 5Controlling the Weather overlay on the chart EES GE ee 253 B 1 5 1 Time marnaeserient Held iS RES EG IE GE ee GR GN EG GE GE De GE ie Ge hous 253 B LSZ Display Controllers ER ESE aaa GE DE DE HE EE Go EE 254 8 1 6EtStor VIEWS EG ER OG baa ee EE Halad baat Anton oa SE Uk IB ha EE EE E EE ee 255 B 1 6 1 Ending a custom view 255 SEM CUI S OM ie AE MEE SEN EE EE LE EE EN 256 B 1 8Explanations of weather data chart symbols EE GEGEE GEE 256 B 1 9Selection of units for wind speed temperature etc 257 B 1 10Treatment of downloaded weather forecasts SS SG SS Gee 258 Bil de PAT Se TUNES rere cio ese ee ed 259 B 1 12Set the alarm settings lt lt lt EE OE ean Ee GE DES SEGE ALA EE EE RE RANA EE 259 B 1 13About alarm conditions EES SG SG GE cece cece cece ee eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 260 B 1 14The timeline feature EG GES e ee eee SG EG ES ee 261 B KATAONG NAN aa nal mah once da ata EA AE Ge sed ER EE EE OG GE GE EE ESE ah NANA 204 Bez Radar overla KA 264 B 2 2Radar display slider control 265 B 3Piracy Information EE EERS EE SEE GE SS EE GR hed SE ANING Ge ribs dade SS Ee GE SE Ge GE S
39. EG aa Laa Laa LLALLA LLALLA LLALLA LaaLa aLaaa aLa 68 4 1 5 Automatic route generation with Jeppesen C Routes cece cece cece cceccececeeeeees 69 4 1 5 1AbOULE ROUTES sb SE N SE E ER Ee DE Ee ee ERA RES ER Re Ee GE 69 41 5 2 EC ROUTES od ESE EE EE SERE EE GEE SG DER OE RE SR EE EO DOG GE GE ER Se GE AGE SE 70 4 1 5 3 Route name EES ccc eee cee eee ce eee eee eee tence eee Doea oarre enan 70 4 1 5 4 Enter a new stop for the voyage u GEE 70 A 1 5 5 Port ol eall HSE EED SE ESE Maen EE EE EG EE EE GEE sae GE EE 70 4 1 5 6 Restrictions add and delete eee ee eee Gee 71 4 1 6 7Restrictions OPUONS vasa choses ee oleae tise Ee eevee eed eludes eee bees 72 4 1 5 8 Create Port of call list with the on screen keyboard 2 ceceeeeeeececeeceeeeeees 73 4 1 5 9 Create the route cece cece cece cece cece cence cece e cece Ge eie 73 4 16 SearclarndReseue SSAR EE sus ite Ge nares EE ve De BEG EE ins HO 73 4 1 6 1 Special conditions for the QRS patterntype AQ 74 4 1 7 Primary and secondary routes anakan LAN eee eel wane Ge RE Ge Ee EG ee Ueda De DE Ge 75 4 1 7 1 Transfer of primary and secondary routes to another TECDIS unit 75 4 1 8 Route organizer 75 4 1 8 1 Route selector and route search SES e eee eee eee cece cece ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 76 A RSZ EX OOM US FOULeS s o parts Serer iek et woah ah aun saudades GE EE EE GED 11 ATS RA 11 4 19 Delete selected TOUGH a EES R
40. Note that the subject line of the response from Jeppesen Marine C Map shows how many answers are mailed to you in total Note that the download window can be hidden by pressing the Data button pending the response files The Weather overlay window can be closed completely or TECDIS can be stopped without resulting in problems with the download To enter answer files reopen Weather overlay window and press the Data button Save all received mail attachments that have extension Dat or JWP on a USB memory stick Insert the USB memory stick containing the received files into an available USB port in the TECDIS unit and press Load Reply Files Navigate to the received subscription info file s and press the Select button Subscription loading is now complete and TECDIS is ready to download weather data x The following weather forecasts have been successfully downloaded Press Load and Return to load these forecasts and return Global ECMWF 25 km Start Date 27 06 2012 10 days ieee ER EG When the response files have been processed a report for the down load is displayed Later when the weather is downloaded an addi tional Load and Return button will be available for immediate viewing of downloaded weather trend 250 B 1 3 B 1 4 Appendix B Optional add ons Control of weather subscription U HI Ka 2706 2012 1354 12 Na pp phi Global ECMWF 300 km Z ml M Global 3 0 degree model fro
41. SOD9 9151 BDC4 3EE7 3759 2E17 3413 CSE1 ZEDO 899B CD13 ZACD SOD9 9151 BDC4 3EE Public Key Text File BIG q 3759 ZE17 962E DDCC 369C BASE BBZ6 OEE6 B6Al Z6D9 346E 38CS f f BIG q f f BIG g 962E DDCC 369C BASE BBZ6 OEE6 B6Al Z6D9 346E 38CS 6784 71B2 7A9C F44E E91A 49C5 147D BlA9 AAFZ 44FO 5443 4D64 BIG g 8693 1D2D 1427 1B9E 3503 OB71 FD73 DA17 9069 B3ZE 2935 630E 6784 71B2 7A9C F44E E91A 49C5 147D BlA9 AAFZ 44FO 1C20 6235 4DOD AZOA 6C41 6E50 BE 79 4CA4 SA43 4D64 8693 1DZD 1427 1B9E 3503 OB71 FD73 DAL f f BIG y 9069 B3ZE 2935 630E 1C20 6235 4DOD AZOA 6C41 6ESO 963F 14E3 ZBAS 3729 28F2 4F15 B073 OC49 D31B 28ES C764 1002 BE79 4CA4 564D B959 95B1 SCF8 800E DS4E 3548 67B8 ZBB9 S97B 1582 69E0 ff BIG 79F0 C4F4 926B 1776 1CCB 9EB7 7C9B 7EFS 963F 14E3 2BAS 3729 28F2 4F15 B073 0C49 D31B ZEES Trust Selected C764 1002 564D B959 95B1 SCF amp BOOE DS4E 3548 67B8 ZBBS 597B 1582 69EO 79FO C4F4 926B 1776 1CCB 9EB7 Delete Selected PESB i SES Load Certificate An over view of all installed certificates is shown in the left column To load a new certificate press the Load Certificate button Select Certificate to load 2x File name Folders primar crt FA rimar crt a PS PA C9 ENC ROOT a x List files of type Drives Certificates Eed f NAVTOR EN Network A new window appears Here you select the correct location for your certificate At this point it is the CRT file you should select Press the OK butto
42. TECDIS is running 218 A 3NMEA Data OSSE SEE EE GEE NE NLA NA AE EE AE GO EMAN oe ES Ed 219 A 3 1NMEA Input EE anaoa EE EG EE cee eeccceeeeeeeees 219 A 32NMEA OUTPUT se he ett note eae runes tt ee De EE GE DE ie 224 A 3 3Supported NMEA sentences 225 A 4Vessel settings Specification 0 2 2 ccc cece eee eee 227 A 4 1More about restoring saved default values __ 230 A 4 2More about T setup TSZ files 231 A 5Chart installation Misc 0 200 202 0 ceccccceccecceeccecceeee 232 A 5 1More about Monitor Calibration 00 00 2200 e eee 233 AA OS EED SE tesa ER DE GEE GO eee 235 A 6 1System licenses TELcahrt License 235 A 6 2Jeppesen licenses C Map License 2222222 236 A 7Track Control Settings 2 e cece ee 239 A 7 1The autopilot field 239 A 7 2The Startin Requirements field 2 EE SEE 240 A 7 3The Default values new route field 240 A 7 4Other settings cece cece cece cc cceccceccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeee 240 216 Appendix A TECDIS Setup A 1 TECDIS Setup at a glance TECDIS Setup contains the most important settings in TECDIS These settings are divided in to 4 5 tabs depending on the system add ons you have purchased NMEA Data see page 219 Here you set all in and output sensor settings These are sent as NMEA sentences over either comports or an IP net
43. Text amp B8TDS01 TXT Image B800801 1IF Object name 007 P 10 TEST TEXT FILE AIO COMPLIANCE Type Preliminary Notice Information Test preinm LS only ENC affected GB400797 Textual description GBTDSOLIXT Pictorial representation GB800801 TIF Information attributes Text Image Images can be zoomed in and out on this is done with the zoom buttons to the right of the image display AIO Status By pressing the AIO Status button you will enter the status mode giving you information on the current update status of all loaded AIO data Dette viser status for nar all AIO data sist ble oppdatert 162 Chapter 6 Chart installation and maintenance 6 3 2 5 AIO Options panel Innstillinger for AIO settes fra AlO inspektgren The AIO Options panel is opened by clicking the Options button aa EE AIO Options 7 T P EP NI Test tempnm LS SS VW Wk W ONCP 10 test preinm to be updated and deleted X No Information no info add M Texts 7 Areas etas Joeymetf wies mst a 7 Area fill Find notice 007 In the options panel you can T Temporary notices Select which AIO objects to P Preliminary notices display EP ENC specific preliminary notices N I No information Select how to display the AlO ica cael ak Gabo see AlO types and display on page 160 objects In this field you can enter a search phrase and search for any AIO notice installed in Search for objects notices TECDIS Press Enter to start
44. To view this display mode press the Flood Ebb button if available Stream info MT O ee UH C Local lt Dato PE ng Tid Direction Speed GMT 29 sep 2011 f Eb OT 245 1 62 kn kal With this functionality activated the crosshairs for the next flow or ebb is displayed The tidal graph displayed will also change shape and now displays the difference between the median sea level and the current sea level When the crosshairs align with this new tidal curve the tidal direction changes s1314 5 7 Dead Reckoning Mode The loss of both primary and secondary position activates automatically Dead Reckoning Mode Position is inserted or updated to the position shown in the center of the map by pressing the S key on keyboard Dead Reckon Mode can also be activated manually by inserting Lines of Position Data from log and gyro are used when available or values must be entered manually 132 Chapter 5 Other functions 5 8 NAVTEX Ty If a NAVTEX receiver is connected to TECDIS the Navtex button will be 5 8 1 available on the main toolbar First you have to select the NAVTEX stations This is done from the overview charts Press the Navtex button and the NAVTEX stations are displayed over the charts in gray Left click a station to select it Selected stations are displayed in blue TECDIS will only shown information for the selected NAVTEX stations ar NG ds Torshavn D F T
45. a subscription renewal WARNING SSE 20 One or more ENC subscriptions will expire in less than 30 days Contact your During S63 startup One or more of the installed Cell Permits are expired During loading One or more of the Cell Permits have expired During S63 startup One or more of the installed Cell Permits will expire in less than 30 days Obtain a valid Cell Permit from the chart supplier and enter them in the S63 Chart Loader During loading One or 305 data supplier for a subscription renewal SSE 20 Subscription for this ENC will expire in less than 30 days Please contact your data supplier to renew the subscription licence SSE 26 This ENC is not authen ticated by the IHO acting as the Scheme Admin istrator Specified path does not contain valid S63 data This system does not support the S63 version of specified data This system does not support this cell permit version more Cell Permits for ENC cells which are available on chart media CD ROM USB memory stick etc will expire in less than 30 days Cell Permit for the specified chart cell expires in less than 30 days The chart cell is signed by the chart supplier but not by the IHO as the S 63 standard requires The specified location does not contain valid S 63 data The S63 Chart Loader supports S63 data format version 1 0 and 2 0 of the S63 standard The specified S63 d
46. allow you to pan the chart in all directions arrow keys zoom in and out zoom keys and switch presentation to a different position double click Query Cursor key or to own vessel position center key Du kan panorere zoome inn og ut samt sentrere kartet pa eget skip Zoom in Zoom out Mi Pa Dobbeltklikker du objektinspektgr knappen sa vil posisjonsverktgyet apnes og du kan taste inn en ny posisjon ved a aktivere de numeriske tastene pa tastaturet 271 B 5 5 Numeric mode Backspace Num lock Fa pe OO DULULUL GIBIS Enter a When you enter a tool or menu in TECDIS which requires insertion of numbers you can change to numeric mode using the NUM key The LED lights for the numeric keys are ON as long as numeric mode is active Pressing the NUM key again will deactivate numeric mode In numeric mode you also have backspace TAB and enter keys available B 5 5 1 Alternative numerical functions In TECDIS numeric keys have generic functions which are available when you are not in a tool or menu that requires insertion of numbers These functions are as follows Toggle between the day dusk and night monitor color modes Toggle between display orientations North Radar Head STD S52 AUTO presentation USER presentation Conning display Weather display option Radaroverlay option EBL VRM functions ARPA 10 AIS Enter functions as left trackball button in the pointer s position
47. and TECDIS Setup to the settings that were present the last time TECDIS Setup was closed Read Restore saved default values M ore Restore saved default values Depth below transducer Here the distance from the keel to the sensor can be set in steps of 0 1 meter Depth transducer 20 m from bow TE 5 m above keel A 4 1 More about restoring saved default values When you restore settings from a backup file on the TECDIS Service Key you have to follow this procedure 1 Press the restore saved default values button 2 A dialogue window called Restore to xxxxx Locate setup file to restore from and click OPEN is opened xxxxx is the eToken system ID for your TECDIS An example of and eToken number is eT 55001 3 Navigate the folders until you find TECDIS Service Key The file that contains all settings is called T setup xxxxx tsz 4 Select this file and press the OK button 230 Appendix A TECDIS Setup A 4 2 More about T setup TSZ files A T setup xxxxx tsz file is generated every time you start and stop TECDIS Setup The file is saved by 1 entering a TECDIS Service Key in the TECDIS unit stopping the TECDIS programme starting the TECDIS Setup programme stopping the TECDIS Setup programme removing the TECDIS Service Key repeat the procedure for TECDIS no 2 OY a T setup xxxxx tsz files can be used by Telko in an analysis of the system settings This aids in most support
48. and sending User Permits can be found in the cha6 1 4 Create the User Permit file see page 143 crate user permit The procedure for installation is as follows 1 Insert a TECDIS Service Key in an available usb port in the TECDIS unit Wait until the Service mode label appears in the bottom right corner of the chart view and then you exit the TECDIS program Insert Navot Navstick in the TECDIS unit Start the S63 Chart Loader program Navigate the file structure until you find and select Navstick Telko Chart Loader v2 00 E Load Charts Licenses View Logs Certificates Select Chart CD or Update Location Navtor ENG Nays om avtor aVoync Toun S63 DL Test 4 7 2 15 Updated 22 05 2012 O Updater5 TEST zip amp My Computer s8 3 Floppy 4 LOAD PERMITS AND CHARTS ss Local Disk C ss Local Disk D 2 DVD RAM Drive E ss NAVTOR_ENC F 4 The system automatically recognizes Navtor Navstick Press the 139 LOAD PERMITS AND CHARTS button to start loading cell permits and charts into TECDIS Telko Chart Loader v2 00 Loading chart cell 45 of 20649 Estimated time remaining 7 hours 17 minutes mg o licence verifying compiling loaded successfully CA876807 000 Decrypting SSE 20 licence verifying compiling loaded successfully CA876808 000 Decrypting SSE 20 licence verifying compiling loaded successfully CA876808 001 Decrypting SSE
49. cases 231 A 5 Chart installation Misc The procedure for installing charts in TECDIS Setup is explained in 6 1 1 Quick installation with Jeppesen SENC charts see page 137 TECDIS 7 TELchart ECS Setup local Ip 192_168_0 _233 Nmea Data Specification Chart Installation Mise Licensing Track Control Monitor Calibration and Test eri Copy Chart Database to Harddisk Monitor Calibration Status Insert the chart CD and follow the instructions that appear Installed Databases S63 GB 1 Calibration Name HD24T24MMD for DVI ChartletsBase 1 Default Monitor Type Unknown ENG 575 jai 5 Read Chart Database CD D CD DVD Identify Monitor and Load Automatic Calibration Select the CD ROM drive Manual Calibration Load Calibration File Found ENG 876 This Database has already been installed Monitor Connection Tests Alternatives Start C Remove Delete this Database from the harddrive Remove Licenses Start C Map Chart Manager Remove chart licenses for this database Set this Database as default Miscellaneous The tab Chart installation Misc contains the following Copy Chart H Gives access to updating removing and reinstalling chart Database to databases Harddisk Enter Ves Here you have to state the vessel and owner information sel Inform This information is necessary for chart licensing and war ation ranty purposes Saves the information entered in Vessel In
50. ccc cccccccccccccccccceceeceeeeeeeees 98 4 5 Notifications and alarms 202 c cece eee e cece eee ee 99 4 5 1 Confirm alarms and warnings 2222222222eeeeeeeeeeeee 100 SARIE E assess oe eta et a EG EE es 101 4 533 Alarm TERTS ESE HEESE GER ER EE EE OS RE succes Ee AE GES AE 102 4 5 4 Warning text 104 4 5 5 Text messages EE SS GE GE GE 2a2a2a 106 4 6 Past track lines EE ES ee De bi add niy LG LAN SEE SR EE ed 107 4 6 1 Primary position source ESE cee eee GE Ge 107 4 6 2 Secondary position source EE 108 4 6 3 Convert past track to route cece cece eee 108 4 6 4 Show and Hide buttons 2000 c cece eee cece eee eee 109 4 7 Maritime calculations 00 00 00 22 cece eee eee eee e eee eee 110 CLAY fe es QS AA eee ES RE EE DE GE 110 4 7 2 Lines of Position LOOP 112 6 lt 4 1 Route planning 4 1 1 Route planning in TECDIS is easy to master and at the same time it is a powerful toolset In this chapter you will get an introduction to route planning in general and an overview of the tools available for you Knowledge of navigation in general and approved training in the use of ECDIS is a prerequisite for correct use of TECDIS in route planning and navigation An introduction Route planning is a key activity that forms the base of any safe voyage A route plan is a comprehensive port to port guide developed by and utilized by the vessels navigators to find t
51. data from sensor for COG SOG 2 TECDIS is no longer receiving data from sensor for Heading 1 TECDIS is no longer receiving data from sensor for Heading 2 TECDIS is no longer receiving data from sensor for water speed TECDIS is no longer receiving data from sensor for Radar Arpa 1 TECDIS is no longer receiving data from sensor for Radar Arpa 2 TECDIS is no longer receiving data from sensor for Radar Cursor 1 TECDIS is no longer receiving data from sensor for Radar Cursor 2 TECDIS is no longer receiving data from sensor for AIS TECDIS is no longer receiving data from sensor for Depth TECDIS is no longer receiving data from sensor for Relative Wind TECDIS is no longer receiving data from sensor for Route Anti grounding Possible dangerous objects in the safety zone Error in transferring active route between primary and secondary TECDIS First warning for upcoming course change Only for 104 early warning Change Course LAST warning Chart license expiring check license status Dynamic licensing update deadline Dynamic licensing credits low Missing netw connection TECDIS Setup Export IP Target buffer use gt 95 Reduce AIS range Target buffer full Reduce Ais range Ship CPA WARNING Track Control Final warning for upcoming course change Only for Track Control One or more chart licenses will expire in less than 14 days Check the license stat
52. date selected in the upper field Visual replay Replay voyage Noon button opens a list of position course Ais ship data and speed for each hour from 12 00 the previous day to 12 00 the day selected in the upper field For every 4 hours is displayed sailed distance Distance Watch and on the bottom appears total sailed distance Distance total Query ais database Delete old log data Details button opens a window with a detailed log of the hours be ginning with the time set in 00 00 field The log contains detailed information for every minute of vessel s position course and speed on the chart display that is used the chart center and the scale are represented by a cross if e Auto Mode was active e the type of chart used ENC S52 e if the Primary Position Source was used PRI e if the GPS position encoder was ok X if the position was corrected manually it is shown on a separate third line Offset Se illustrasjon 12 t ENC button shows what kind of chart data has been displayed on the screen every minute in the last 12 hours 203 7 6 2 Chapter 7 System settings GAProgram FilestTEFDIGMogENGused txt EHC 1 hr log SKS DEMIHI mmsi 2759965000 276 mai 27014 time Agency Cell EHC ed GEA400797 EB400797 EB400797 EB400797 EB400797 EB400797 EB400797 EB3580210 EB3580210 7188 3000 2700000 3000 22700540 Cancel DR fix button is active
53. distance A critical waypoint is marked with four red exclamation marks When the predetermined limit for a critical point is reached an Point Info alarm is activated and the info window for this critical waypoint appears at the bottom of the chart Any info text entered previously to describe this critical waypoint will also be visible in the information window 91 4 2 7 Chapter 4 Navigation NB Critical waypoint warning is triggered when the vessel moves within the specified range from any heading not just along the route When the warning has been raised the marking of the critical waypoint in the chart will change in to four green exclamation marks To delete a critical waypoint click it with the Chart object inspector and deselect the Warning before point checkbox Hazards and alerts on a route When a new route is created or when an existing route is selected the system will conduct a safety check of the route and generate a list of all hazards and warnings for the entire route you get access to the list of hazards and alerts by clicking on the List route dangers and cautions button on the Route Planning Toolbar This button can either be displayed as an exclamation mark or as a question mark An exclamation mark indicates that the safety check of the route must be done again Click this button to start the security check of the route which will start and run in the background While security is running a
54. for use of the software For more information about TECDIS type specific training and ECDIS training in general please contact Furuno Norway Navigating the user manual The user manual is divided into e A main section with 8 chapters explaining the different functions and menu choices TECDIShas e 4 appendixes that outline different use scenarios optional add on functionality and the TECDIS Setup software Textboxes This user manual uses two textboxes for special information NOTE The red box gives important information alerts on correct use TIP The blue box gives tips and advice for advanced use 174 Help and support To find out more on how to use your TECDIS you can e contact your local Furuno Norway dealer e contact Furuno Norway directly e download the latest version of the TECDIS documentation on our Telko AS website http telko no site Support TECDIS An overview of Furuno Norway s dealer network can be found on the following website http www furuno no en index php forhandlere An overview of the employees at Furuno Norway and their contact inform ation can be found on the following website http www furuno no en index php kontakt 18 Reservations Reservations The TECDIS system and its navigational aid software including electronic chart display and automatic navigation and track control system is an aid in safe maritime navigation All such maritime navigation aids ar
55. format Note that this function only supports files that are supplied by Jeppesen Marine Opens window for downloading weather Download New forecasts Alarm Settings Alarm settings in the Weather NS NE N a Na overlay allows you to specify exactly Va IL what kind of weather conditions you are to be notified about When an alarm criterion is defined TECDIS will provide clear warnings with indication of when and how these factors may be present Such indications are given on the chart together with the weather overlay on the timeline and as redlining on routes Set the alarm settings a tat oe Wind Speed above 20 kn Add Edit Delete M Wind Speed above 20 kn 0R Total Waves Height above 6 04 07 2012 01 00 00 14 07 2012 01 00 00 0 MV ry al Vind B Alarmer FEPfsykioner u E Tilpasse Markor info Sykloner Data Enh Tidsinie fatarmer Allow Missing Wind Speed Ps bo Knots Alarm settings is started by pressing the Alarms button in the Weather window This will open a new field where you can select the type of weather that will give alarms 1 Over the field the following buttons are displayed e Add e Edit e Delete 2 Selecting the Add button opens a new field to the right and a drop down menu appears at the bottom 3 Here you select the kind of weather that will give an alarm and the limit value for it is set in the field at
56. http telko no site support On the website we state when the update was released and you will also find information about which changes have been made to the program through 1 TECDIS Feature Guide released together with each new edition of the TECDIS program Here the most important new and changed fea tures are explained 2 The changelog for TECDIS which is updated with all changes made to the TECDIS program Latest Version 4 7 x 22 Released 31 March 2014 Release History Filename Description o TECUISUpdate exe Update an exisiting installation to the latest version TECDIS Feature MEW Read about the changes and new features in the latest version of Guide pot TECHS Previous Feature Guides Filename Description TECDIS Feature Guide 19 pdf Feature duide for TECDIS version 4 7 x 19 TECDIS Feature Guide 16 pdf Feature guide for TECOIS version 4 7 x 17 TECDIS Feature Guide 17 pdf Feature duide for TECDIS version 4 7 x 17 TECDIS Feature Guide 16 pdf Feature guide for TECDIS version 4 7 x 1b It is also posiible to download previous Feature Guides if you are updating from an even earlier version 289 C 4 How do I turn on T amp P C 4 1 C 4 2 and AIO T amp P temporary and preliminary notices are an essential part of the work needed to keep charts updated for safe sailing TECDIS has four methods for handling T amp P notices ENC integrated notices Jeppesen T amp P Admiralty Information Overlay AlO
57. is drawn as an orange preliminary route When the Add button is pressed the cursor will change and with a left click in the desired position in the chart the first point of a red restriction line is set The other end of the restriction line is set by moving the cursor to the desired location and left click again There is no limit to the number of restriction lines that can be deployed A click on the Del button deletes the last plotted restriction line a second click on the Del button removes the second last restriction line and so on Restrictions options The C Routes can be adjusted to Rute navn 20120426 Oslo Kiel avoid planning the route through New Stop Eget skip posisjon D l fairways and or channels To Specified Position set ra restrict or prohibit certain passages lam Denmark EN Ad through the fairways and or alt x 5 y l Restrictions Add m Flere valg Keyboard LAG RUTE Avbryt channels remove the checkmark in a jgnorere skip dypg ende Tilate farleder kanaler front of the fairway or channel s 3 eens brei a Frioritere dypvanns rute Arctic North West Passage name in Passages Allowed field EE Ee Buran Chamel vi East River N Y M Bruke standard korridor bredde Zi Ennlich Phannel The fairway channel s name that is checked highlighted in the Passages Allowed field will be indicated on the chart with a Furth
58. labeled Databases you have to select the chart database or the function the license code is valid for 3 Inthe Data Set or Area Name field you select the chart area or the functionality the license code is valid for 4 Then you enter the received license code in the License String field The license code is received from either Jeppesen charts or sup port telko no function 5 Finish and exit by pressing the Add License button 236 Appendix A TECDIS Setup 6 Repeat this process for each chart area and each license code in each chart database A 6 2 2 Get Expired licenses C Map License System ID Databases Jel Telko 55003 ENC x Add License manually Display expired licenses before date 05 2015 Get expired licenses Licenses list Add Licenses from file License order The Get expired licenses button gives you access to an overview of all licenses that has expired within a selected date month and year A 6 2 3 License list C Map License S N System ID Databases Jel Telko 55003 Add License manually 07 2014 Zone O ENG 1DDEDSF33ED1E723 Get expired licenses Licenses list Add Licenses from file License order The Licenses list button gives you access to a list of valid licenses sorted by chart database A 6 2 4 Add license from file C Map License System ID Databases def Telko 55003 ENG E E Documents ed Music wel Pictures E Videos
59. left or by selecting the data type from the correct dropdown list When you have selected the data type the entry for that 219 A3 1 1 A 3 1 2 data type in the sensor table to the left is shown with a blue background colour Info text Then you enter a description in the info field to identify the type of sensor data later This can be used as the label for the sensor as it will be visible in any alarms in TECDIS related to the sensors functTECDISion NMEA sentence In the dropdown list for NMEA sentence you select the NMEA sentence your sensor is sending data in Available NMEA sentences in the dropdown list will change according to the selected data type sensor type When a given sensor can send out more than one of the supported NMEA sentences the highest placed alternative in the list below should be used Position 1 og Position 2 1 S GNS GNSS fix data 2 S GGA GPS fix data 3 S GLL Geografic position Lat Long 4 S RMC Recommended minimum specific GNSS Data 5 AIVDO AIS own ship position UAIS VHF Data link own vessel report COG SOG 1 and COG SOG 2 1 S VTG Course and speed over ground 2 S RMC Recommended minimum specific GNSS data 3 S OSD Own ship data 4 AIVDO AIS own ship position UAIS VHF Data link own vessel report Heading 1 and Heading 2 1 S THS True heading and status 2 S HDT Heading true 3 S OSD Own ship data 4 S VHW Water Speed and Heading 5 IAIVDO AIS own ship po
60. loaded manual calibration file does not match the connected monitor Acquire the correct calibration file from support telko no and perform manual calibration again Contact support telko no or an authorized dealer Calibration was successful but the monitor type has to be manually verified Control that the calibration is correct by comparing the model name on the monitor itself and the name given in Calibration Name Calibration of the monitor was successful and verified se Calibration Name reports the name of the manually or automatically loaded calibration file Monitor Type is the name of the monitor model as reportd by the monitor itself Identify Monitor and Load Automatic Calibration start an automated identification of the monitor type and then tries to automatically load the correct calibration file from the monitor to the computer Manual Calibration Load Calibration File allows for manual loading of monitor calibration files form the folde C Drivers TECDIS Monitor Connection Tests gives access to tests for verifying that the monitor serial connection to the computer is correct testing buzzer sound adjusting background lighting and performing a monitor identi fication test 234 Appendix A TECDIS Setup A 6 Licences In this tab you will find information about your system licenses and Jeppesen C MAP licenses TEGDIS TELchart EGS Setup local Ip 192 168 0 283 EE w xi Nmea Data
61. makes changing computer unit an easy task Note This will not transfer your routes tracks and symbols to the new unit That is done with the procedure described in chapter 7 5 see page 199 and using the function Copy out to file 2937 This blank page is automatically inserted where appropriate to ensure that new Chapters begin on a recto page Troubleshooting In this chapter you will find error codes and system warnings you may encounter in TECDIS You will also find plausible causes and one or more solutions D 1Trobleshooting general EG GEGEE ee 299 D 2Troubleshooting connection issues EE 301 D 2 1General tests EED NID ANA EE DEER DEE OR SE EE GE DEE DE De Kaha GE Ee ee EG EG GE EE 301 D 2 2Connection tests for internet SESSE SES EG cece cece ee eee ee eceeeeeceeeeees 301 D 2 3Connection tests for email EES SES SS cece cece cece eee cece cece ES Ee ee 302 D 3Troubleshooting S63 Chart Loader EE EG GE EG 303 D 4Troubleshooting Weather overlay 308 DA TCOMMOCHION CUI OFS AA Nad banaue brit EE OE SE EE a EE SE EEEE 308 D 4 2Error messages GE ee 308 298 Appendix D Troubleshooting D 1 Trobleshooting general In this section you will find possible solutions for general issues in TECDIS Experienced issue can t activate the route My TECDIS cer tificate has expired can t access the Tides function Routes are not trans fe
62. not audible 3 When the Ais vessel watch is set to 2 an alarm is issued when a vessel s course vector crosses a line or edge of an hazardous area The alarm will also be audible 129 5 6 Tidal information TECDIS can use and display tidal information from Jeppesen s Tidal service This service gives access to information about the tidal movements for a large part of the world Note Tides require Professional or Jeppesen PRIMAR chart to function Contact Jeppesen for information about the coverage in the Tides service for your voyages The tidal information is displayed in a separate AN Markor 08 48 083 N window inside TECDIS This window is opened F Pos 010 43 084 E by pressing the Tide button to the right of the depth sensor display in the TECDIS information BRG 1 108 8 2 98 NM por 0PTH 40 0 m Tide The tides are displayed for the tidal station closest to the vessel or closes to the chart view center if the vessel is outside the chart view The tidal information is available independently of the depth sensor 5 6 1 Tides The tidal window gives a graphical display of the tides for the next 24 hours The name of the tidal window is the same as the name of the tidal station shown Time and level of the highest and lowest tide of the viewed period along with the current tidal levels are presented in the lower part of the window BURNTGOAT HEAD GMT f HANE UMI TIN
63. oe ns a NO 278 B 5 6 B 5 7 Appendix B Optional add ons User defined keys TECDIS Keypad has two user defined keys These can be configured as shortcuts to often used functions such as video switching The keys are defined in the Setup menu tab see chapter 7 2 see page 186 Video switching With TECDIS Keypad you can control video switching in TECDIS This allows you to temporarily change the monitor input of your TECDIS monitor to the video signal you want For example can ferries use the TECDIS monitor to display cameras used for docking which is a situation where a camera feed is more important to safe sailing than the display of TECDIS and charts TECDIS display video feed display TECDIS will still be running and give audible alarms when needed You can easily switch back to displaying the TECDIS system by pressing any key on the TECDIS Keypad or a keyboard trackball connected to the TECDIS system The video feed is only connected to the monitor and requires no additional software Video switching is configured in TECDIS Setup see appendix A 4 see page 227 219 Video switching can also be turned on from the main toolbar If Radar Overlay is configured video switching is available on right click If Radar Overlay is not configured a VID button is shown instead 280 Appendix B Optional add ons B 6 Furuno RCU 018 If a Furuno RCU 018 control unit is connected to the TECDIS syste
64. progress window appears You can abort the loading at any time by pressing the ABORT button in the top right corner In the progress window information about the chart cells that are loaded is displayed 11 If an error occurred during download this is displayed in a separate log window From this window you can select if you want to A load the chart cell despite the warning B skip the chart cell and continue chart loading C Stop the chart loading If you are unsure if S57 error messages or warnings affect the chart validity and or navigation you should consult with your chart provider 12 When all chart cells are loaded the program has to update the chart coverage area and internal data In the progress window this is shown as Finalizing import This can be time consuming and 149 might take up to an hour It cannot be aborted TELKO 63 Chart Loader v1 04 H Finished Loading finished at 15 02 37 Return BE ABA Ba a se BAKER EER AN EE BE SEER aes ep ef E EIE Starting import of Primar BASE GD Issue WK11 04 N0400512 000 Decrypting verifying compiling loaded with WARNINGS See Log N05F1615 000 Decrypting verifying compiling loaded with WARNINGS See Log NOSF1615 001 Decrypting verifying compiling loaded with WARNINGS See Log Import completed Cells successfully loaded from this exchange set 3 Licensed cells not loaded from this exchange set 0 Cells skipped Equivalent or new
65. routes Routes can be exported in the formats CSV Ist txt To export a route to csv Ist select that route in the route organiser then press the Select button and then the Export button In the export window that appears you select export location and file format Csv files allows you to view route details in Microsoft Excel and similar software Lst files do not contain index lines When saving for export you can use file type to filter which file types are displayed in the folders This does NOT alter the file format used for saving the file that has to be changed manually in the file name field see Saving and exporting a route list on page 82 see Saving and exporting routelist on page 1 4 1 8 3 Importing routes TECDIS can import files in the Ist file format To import an Ist file press the import button in the route organiser A new import window appears and here you select the file and file location of import 4 1 9 Delete selected route xx If you want to delete a route from the route database you use the Delete button om the route planning toolbar If a route is selected or activated then it will be deleted If no routes are selected or activated all routes in the chart will be shown and the cursor will change to the route selector ff Chapter 4 Navigation Now you can select a route for deletion You have to confirm that you want to delete the selected file Press OK to confirm or abort to s
66. selected route e Great circle route e Add index lines 64 4 1 3 Draw a route directly in the charts Press the Make a new route button to start the process of creating a route 1 The cursor is placed on the position in the charts where you want to place the first waypoint Press the left mouse button to set the first waypoint W1 This will start the voyage planner and a new window will appear at the bottom of the display In it you can enter the route name and several describing tags from to owner tags This information is used in route search and the route organiser 2 Continue drawing the route by moving the cursor to the desired loc ation for the next waypoint and press the left mouse button to place the waypoint A line will now appear between the two way points indicating the route leg You are now ready to place the next waypoint Continue placing waypoints until you are satisfied with the route displayed in the chart 3 Finish drawing the route by pressing the right mouse button or by selecting OK in the route planner toolbar A route can contain up to 500 waypoints The corridor width is set in the voyuage planner as described in 4 1 10 Voyage planner see page 79 If a turn radius is deemed invalid by the system if it is too big the turn will not be drawn in the chart and a warning will be given each time the route is selected Waypoint coordinates can be entered manually with the keyboard
67. set some search pat tern adjustments The search direction length of line num ber of lines and the distance between lines are all adjustable ije CC mg Ate Chapter 4 Navigation Type Sektor Utvidet kvadrat Parallell C QRS start kurs Linje avstand Antal MER Felt hredde am Rute Angre 4 Choose if you want the pattern to become a symbol line or a route If you select route the search pattern will generate a route that is activated automatically for route sailing 4 1 6 1 Special conditions for the QRS pattern type The QRS search pattern differs from the other because is not a continuous line and thus cannot be converted to a route QRS is a numbered grid where the anchor point the start and the leg distance can be selected Everything else is fixed and cannot be edited Up to four QRS search patterns can be visible on the chart simultaneously To remove the QRS search pattern return to the SAR window and deselect the checkbox of those patterns that will be removed 74 4 1 7 Primary and secondary routes 1 ae z 4 1 7 1 4 1 8 In TECDISyou can set up for fast l We switching between routes for sailing by utilizing primary and secondary routes When you select draw a Uwa sly route in the default is that it is selected drawn as primary W3 route TECDIS Then the route 1 Y button in the route planning toolbar is marked
68. the bottom right Complete the alarm setting by pressing the Add button again 2992 4 Selecting one of the options in the box that already has a defined alarm value followed by pressing the Edit button opens a new field to the right In this field the alert criteria can be adjusted added or deleted Areas that have weather data that exceeds the alarm con ditions are marked as gray fields in red color 5 Inthe timeline specified alarm conditions are shown as a red line along the bottom of the graph purple when cyclones are near and green for normal condition 6 The parts of an activated route that runs through an area that will be shaded in red in a scenario in the future when the vessel will pass estimated are colored red while the Weather overlay is act ive 7 All weather data displayed on the chart relates to the time that is controlled by controllers in the timer field in the upper left corner in the Weather window The calculated position of own ship is shown with a symbol that moves along the active route on the chart syn chronously with the settings in the timer field and Weather overlay symbols on the chart O pa Jis Stl me Af a ni F Pressure MELT DUE ID Arsise RL1M 07 200 12 00 00 B 1 13 About alarm conditions An alarm condition can be based on e certain types of weather data for example Wind speed above 20 m s e acombination of several types of weather
69. the last waypoint or for a user selected waypoint To switch between these modes press the EP end WP X button When WP end is active the button will display WP end The same adheres to the planned speed button To calculate DTG ETA between waypoints during route planning see 4 1 10 4 ETA calculation during route planning see page 81 4 2 5 Primary and secondary routes In TECDIS you can use two routes simultaneously allowing you to easily switch between routes when in navigation mode When set up you can have a primary route that is active and a secondary that is checked and pre activated available for switching on demand For more information see chapter 4 1 Route planning see page 63 4 2 6 Notify Waypoint Critical Point on the voyage If a critical WP on the route is of particular interest TECDIS caTECDISn provide an warning at a pre determined W 3 distance TE t h To use this feature enable the Chart object inspector function from the Main Toolbar and click on the WP where the warning is to be placed An information window that provides details on the selected waypoint opens in the lower part of the chart In the lower left corner of this window check activate Warning before point feature and specify the time or the distance before the particular waypoint when the warning should be given Put a checkmark in the box to the left and then when point shall be notified in time or
70. the target The observed value can now be entered into the the small field near the anchor point distances are entered in Nm If a numeric value is not entered adjust the EBL VRM so that the correct observation value is shown on the registration line For 112 4 7 2 2 bearing lines the line should extend throughout the area where the ship can be 6 Press the left mouse button to exit the placing of the observation in the chart 7 If the observation was made more than one minute ago set the time of observation in the registration line 8 Write a brief description of the observation in the text box on the registration line optional When an observation is made it will appear on the chart and labeled with the name and date of observation Two versions of each observation will be visible on the chart The first version remains where the observations were recorded The second bold version is tweaked in real time according to current dead reckoning parameters course speed This ensures that observations made at different times can be used together to provide a position Features of the LOP tab The buttons in the LOP tab works as follows The Minimize button minimizes the entire Maritime calculations window but retains all the keys for function selection and registered values and any DR The Auto 2xLOP button opens to put out two bearings immediately after another without having to move the cursor back to the b
71. the true wind direction is shown this is indicated with a T next to wind speed frame and so for the relative direction with a R The wind speed can be changed from meters per second m s knots kn and Beaufort B by clicking on the wind speed frame 119 5 2 2 Conning Anchorguard By right clicking the conning La display button in the main toolbar Uf an anchor watch conning display is HDT The anchor watch displays e drifting e heading in relation to the anchor point e wind information The Anchorguard feature has the same functionality as Docking display in relation to the wind Click the Reset button to set the anchor point the current position is placed in the center of the Circle Safe radius whose size is ajusted with the slider Stprrelse pa sikker radius sirkelen settes med skyvekon trollen Circle radius is read from the display for maximum drift max drift 1000 meters Select the alarm mode with the slider situated in lower left corner In the following table the alarm display modes are presented The anchor watch functionality has to be deactivated manually 120 Off View Chart view and the warning field Chapter 5 Other functions Description Off option turns off all Anchorguard function ality and removes any Anchorguard circle from the chart View option selects a blue Anchorguard circle in the chart with a radius having the d
72. tool Repeat all steps under step 3 for all other chart databases When finished go to step 5 C Map CM93 3 update send email update orders to updates c map no x Auto Updating f Get updates from directory Save order Updating Log Review Updates Get updates from Mails 4 Maximum return email size Unlimited Z Databases ENC X 0 50653 P 50653 Piracy 50653 Software modules 52020 ENC 62020 P 52020 Piracy Screens a For semi automatic update do as follows A B ammo Insert a TECDIS Service Key in an available usb port Select the desired chart database from the dropdown list in the semi automatic update window Select which folder on TECDIS Service Key the order files should be saved Press the Save order button Move TECDIS Service Key to a computer with email access Send an email with the order files to updates c map no Updates is an automated service and C MAP will reply within 5 minutes The answer file has to be copied to the TECDIS so transfer the files to the TECDIS Service Key and insert it in an available usb port In the semi automatic update window select the file location and press the Get updates from dir ectory button The progress will now be displayed in the dropdown list at the bottom of the window A confirmation window appears when the update is complete Press OK to finish the update tool 5 Close the update window for the chang
73. top of the dis play It will not change even if the vessel later changes course e HEAD e stands for head up meaning that the vessels bow will always be shown towards the top of the display The vessel will have a fixed position on the display and the chart view will alter during sailing relative motion e Radar e means that the chart orientation always will follow the con nected radar orientation If you change the orientation or the range of the radar TECDIS will automatically reorient itself with the same chart view and chart scale as the radar e RADAR 2 e Only appears if two radars are connected to TECDIS TECDIS 59 Navigation In this chapter we will look closer at how TECDIS can be used during planning and performing voyages You will also get an in depth view of how TECDIS works as an anti grounding system and how you can maintain a safe voyage even if all sensors are lost 4 Route planning SES D EE DE EE SE OE hyaan st 63 4 1 1 An introduction SG SG Gie 63 4 1 2 Starting the route planning tool 64 4 1 3 Draw a route directly in the charts 65 4 1 4 Activating the selected route 2 2 2 SS cece eee cece 68 4 1 5 Automatic route generation with Jeppesen C Routes ___ 69 4 1 6 Search and Rescue SAR ESE e eee cece ence ees 73 4 1 7 Primary and secondary routes 75 4 1 8 Route organizer 2 0 2 0 eee aa 75 4 1 9 Delete selected route SESSE SG eee eee cece ee
74. valg Keyboard LAGRUTE Avbryt ajaja ala 5 6 7 8 9 o x Bs Tab a wel r t yjujijo jp aj ome KTA EE Del zZ Xx c v b m m Shift Create the route IRF E A When all ports of call are placed in the list and are displayed in either yellow or green colours or draft is ignored you can press the CREATE button to start the route generation What has been an orange line indicating the route now is converted in to a preliminary route with waypoints sailing corridor speed annotation direction and is registered in the Route Organiser menu Further work on the route is done via the Route Planning Toolbar before the route is actually used the navigator must check it both automatically and manually Search and Rescue SAR TECDIS has built in support for generation of search and rescue patterns directly in the chart view There are four types of SAR patterns to choose between and they can be defined either as symbols placed in the charts or as routes with full track steering compatibility When you press the SAR button a new SAR window opens where you can set settings such as type start position and symbol colour In the chart view a live preview of the default SAR pattern is shown od 1 Select the search pattern type you want to use 2 Select the search pattern s anchoring point own vessel s position or the chart center 3 Depending on which search pattern is selected you now have to
75. weather datas does not affect the display of the other weather data There are some combinations of selected weather data that can not be displayed simultaneously Waves Temp Clouds and Rain Snow are all best displayed with the colored area but only one of these can be displayed at once However it is possible to show Clouds and Rain Snow at the same time if no other weather data is displayed Custom Views Ver KKI 29 06 2012 70200002 Na Pl gg rrrrrrrrr 29 06 2012 0 00 00 09 07 2012 01 00 00 Omrade Pressure Linjer 1 Total Waves Verdier Temperature liner2 Temperature w Alarmel Sykloner Piler Vind M Bolger Svell Enkel Markor info Sykloner 7 Data Enh Tidslinje Alarmer If a particular view is desirable and default views described above is not sufficient a custom view mode is selected by pressing the Customize button in the lower left corner of the weather window This will replace the default display buttons of fields with flexible options for what to display as range color marked area values only values for each data point Lines 1 contours and lines 2 contours Enabling alarms display of cyclones and arrows for wind waves and swells can also be selected in selection boxes Ending a custom view Pressing the same button again now labeled Basic changes the weather window back to the default view 255 B 1 7 Cursor info In the Cursor In
76. 0 COM port for Furuno Keyboard RCU 018 Furuno Keyboard is only available for TECDIS 2138 Set Input port to COM 2 if the Furuno RCU 018 is connected to the TECDIS Physically the COM 2 port provides live 12VDC power to the Control unit and thus this port cannot be used to any other equipment Er det ikke koblet til en Control enhet settes input porten til A 3 1 11 COM port for CAM control Select the COM port where you have connected a gyro stabilized camera Er det ikke koblet til noen CAM control interface settes denne til AA A 3 2 NMEA Output TEGDIS 7 TELchart EGS Setup local Ip M192 168 0 24a1 Nmea Data Specification Chart Installation Misc Licensing Track Control In the Output tab in the top right corner of the NMEA Data settings panel you will find the following NMEA sentences that TECDIS can transmit For each of the outputs there are choices of which of the physical COM APB RMB RMC WPL RTE Data Nmea linput baud TPA port info Input Output RMG WPL RTE ports the output should be directed trough A 3 2 1 Enabling IP server iti GGA GPS2 COG SOG 1 VTG P2 192 168 0 233 2001 GPS1 COG SOG 2 V
77. 000 000 1500 000 Hydrographic Department Royal Thai Navy 5 8 Commandancia General de la Armada Direcci n de Hid vase 1000 000 D00 000 Ministerio de Defensa Nacional Colombia 2 Ministry of Transport Maritime Directorate Sloven T Coastal Approach 150 000 50 000 Hellenic Navy Hydrographic Service HNHS r X Department for Panning and Infrastructure Wester cologne F Plan al Marka Na Professional s UKHO test and sample datasets 40 000 000 5 000 000 Hong Kong Special Administrative Region amp Survey of Israel ar e mi T Hide Find Import S57 Remove Dataset 5000 Clear All Alerts filo 2 Show By selecting a database from the dropdown list a list of all licensed charts is opened and it is sorted by hydrographic organisations Select a chart in the list to get access to more information This inform ation is displayed in the middle field By double clicking a chart in the list it will be displayed in the chart view if it is licensed If own vessel is moving the chart view will automatically be changed back to the vessel unless Auto is turned off Note The chart library only displays the chart databases selected for viewing in the setup menu tab To the right in the chart library window you find the Chart boundaries function This draws rectangles outlining the charts in the database for the selected scale The scales match the over
78. 146 0 Pos 59 00 530 N DIST TLINM 010 50 559 E COG 277 0 CPA 3 93 NM SOG 15 2kn TCPA 99 8 min M Aktivere Lagre Slette I CPA Melding AIS OK HDG 282 ROT 0 CALL LHDT IMO 007037806 MMS 259158000 Sec Ch 18 B Type 60 Passenger ship Status Under way using engine Destination SFJINO STRISWE ETA 13 01 14 30 Hzd cargo Ship size 1 124 B 19 D 5 4m na Ka All targets within range can be activated by selecting No Limit in the dropdown list for Active in the The AIS menu see page 210 An AIS target is selected by left clicking it it will then be marked in the chart view with a black rectangle and a window will appear showing detailed information about the target in the upper left corner of the chart view LHDT mis BOHUS If there are several AIS targets in the same BRG 146 0 Pos 59 00 530 N position as a result of the selected scale DIST 1LINM 010 50 559 E COG 277 0 GPA 3 93 NM and or vessel density click the same position VSI amp 15 2kn TEPA 29 8 min several times and the ASI window will cycle m Aktivere Lagre Slette between the overlapping AIS targets COPA Melding Ais OE HDG 282 ROT 0 The oen target can be acUvaled by CALL LADT MO 007037806 checking the Activate box In addition the MMSI 259153000 Sec Ch 13 B CPA information for the target can be T
79. 2 3 Global ECMWE 300 km Delete Old Fis 2706202 3 Global ECMWF 300 km o Import Tipagsel Markor info Sykloner Data Enh Tidslinje Alarmer 10 Global ECMWF25km Download New A list of downloaded weather forecasts can be retrieved by pressing the Data button The list that appears contains information about e Forecast Model e Start Date e Days number of days the forecast is for Section closes again when you press the Data button again List of downloaded weather forecasts can be viewed with the following background colors White All information in the weather files are in the past The selected weather forecast can be e loaded by pressing the Load button e deleted by pressing the Delete button e inspected by pressing the Details button in the top right corner of the window Chart area covered by the selected weather forecast is marked in red on the chart if a sufficiently large scale is chosen for the display of the chart In the lower right corner of the window the following buttons are available Displays detailed information about the Current Details selected weather forecast Deletes all weather forecasts that is more than 14 days old Import a weather forecast received via other methods than the one used by pressing the Delete Old Files Import 258 B 1 11 B 1 12 Appendix B Optional add ons Download New button This method allows import of files in the GRB and XML
80. 20 licence verifying compiling loaded successfully CA876811 000 Decrypting SSE 20 licence verifying compiling loaded successfully CA876819 000 Decrypting SSE 20 licence verifying compiling loaded successfully CA876820 000 Decrypting SSE 20 licence verifying compiling The cell permits and charts are now loaded and a progress window appears You can abort the loading at any time by pressing the ABORT button in the top right corner In the progress window information about the chart cells that are loaded is displayed Telko Chart Loader v2 00 Loading finished at 22 55 06 Return 2 th ipa ie ae ppa Japo AE AE AE AA ER BEN OE OO OR AA AAN ER we i el a licence verifying compiling loaded successfully ZA5N0020 005 Decrypting SSE 20 licence verifying compiling loaded successfully ZA5NO020 006 Decrypting SSE 20 licence verifying compiling loaded successfully Finalizing import Import completed Finished Cells successfully loaded from this exchange set 20649 Licensed cells not loaded from this exchange set 0 Cells skipped Equivalent or newer present in SENC 12589 When the chart loading is complete Import Complete is displayed in the progress window The window will also display loading details The chart loading process is finished by pressing the Return button 9 Press the Show README txt button to read the release notes for the chart 10 The loaded charts are
81. 46E 38CS 6784 7IBZ 7A9C F44E ES1A 49C5 147D BlA9 AAFZ 44FO SA43 4D64 BIG g 8693 1D2D 1427 1B9E 3503 OB71 FD73 DA17 9069 B32E 2935 630E 6784 71B2 7A9C F44E E91A 49CS 147D BlA9 AAFZ 44F0 1C20 6235 4DOD AZOA 6C41 6ESO BE79 4CA4 SA43 4D64 8693 1DZD 1427 1B9E 3503 OB71 FD73 DAL BIG y 9069 B32E 2935 630E 1C20 6235 4DOD AZOA 6C41 6E50 AAZS DF9E C3CA 96B7 9D01 3EDS D572 D47C B3F3 BODO 731D EA47 BE 79 dCA4 B106 2 6845 3744 76BE 5825 6RO7 A74D ff BIG y 71DE 2110 4CBA C4BF AAZS DF9E C3CA 96B7 9DOL 3EDS D572 D47C B3F3 80D0 Trust Selected 731D EA47 Bl06 26BA C387 C1FA 3C33 ECSS 6845 3744 76BE 5825 6E07 A74D 607F 7ASE 7B7E 3455 71D8 2110 4CSA C4BF Contact the certificate supplier to independently confirm certificate authenticity 11 When you are confident of the authenticity of the certificate either through the information matching or through contact with the cer tificate issuer you can press the Trust selected button to the left in the window By pressing you confirm that the certificate can be used to approve S63 charts for loading 12 Press OK 13 The certificate loading is now completed 175 6 5 4 6 5 4 1 6 5 4 2 6 5 4 3 Dynamic Licensing Dynamic licensing function in TECDIS includes full support for Jeppesen Marine Dynamic Licensing for ENC and JeppesenPRIMAR charts in C MAP SENC format Dynamic licensing provides a cost effective method to ensure a continuous ENC chart coverage with minimal administrati
82. 7 format is not used directly in the ECDIS system ENC files are compiled into a seamless database System ENC SENC that contains all the required ENCs and are optimized for operational use on board All charts displayed in TECDIS are saved in C MAP SENC System Electronic Navigational Chart format The charts can either be received in this format from the supplier or it can be generated from other formats such as S 63 Vi anbefaler at man ombord pa fart y kun benytter ferdigkompilerte kart Kartkompilering fra ENC data i S57 format bgr kun utfgres i kontrollerte omgivelser pa land Dette er fordi kompileringen til SENC krever at S57 data ma tolkes av kompileringsprogrammet Kompileringsprogrammet vurderer ENC data og avgj r om informasjonen er gyldig eller ikke og det kan oppst situas joner der den vurderer innholdet til non compliant Slike data b r ikke importeres inn i TECDIS systemet ettersom det kan inneholde ukorrekt informasjon og feil En annen fordel med a motta kartene i SENC format er at navigat ren ombord ikke behgver a bruke tid og talmodighet pa a importere ENCer til kartdatabasen en prosess som krever at ENCene er 100 compliant Distribution of ENC in SENC format has been approved under CHRIS meeting in Athens in April 2002 A number of hydrographic organizations HO admits that it facilitates access to official digital cartography and that it has no negative effect on compliance accordance with IMO
83. B Cato 3 Computer Cancel 1 The Add License from file button opens a new field 2 There you navigate in the file structure to the left of the field until you find the password usr file you have received 3 Select the file and confirm adding it by pressing the OK button 237 All chart licenses for all chart databases and all areas included in your purchased license is now activated A 6 2 5 License orde C Map License System ID Databases def Telko 66003 ENG id Add License manually M Subscription Save Order M Order East Asia Hydrographic Commissior a lanan Hudnannanhin and nood Clear 05 2014 Add dataset Add expired at The License order button gives you access to a tool for easy generation of a license order summary that you can send to Jeppesen Get expired licenses Licenses list Add Licenses from file License order 238 Appendix A TECDIS Setup A 7 Track Control Settings In this tab all settings for connection between TECDIS and one of the specified auto pilots are set TECDIS TELchart EGS Setup local Ip 192 1680 233 x Nmea Data Specification Chart Installation Mise Licensing Track Control Autopilot Anschutz NP2025 Anschutz NP5500 Emri SEM200 FAP 2000 Simrad AP80 Starting requirements Class AW B ls max course deviation ki d max lane deviation h min allowed turn radius x 0 01 NM 10
84. Change Course early warning or Change Course LAST warning are not confirmed The vessel has reached the last WP in the active route The vessel s speed is below the limits set in TECDIS TELchart ECS Setup Only for Track Control TECDIS is no longer receiving data from sensor to Position 1 TECDIS is no longer receiving data from sensor to Position 2 TECDIS is no longer receiving data from sensor for Heading 1 Only for Track Control TECDIS is no longer receiving data from sensor for Heading 2 Only for Track Control TECDIS is no longer receiving data from sensor for water speed Only for Track Control Sensor for Position 1 sends a different datum than WGS84 Sensor for Position 2 sends a different datum than WGS84 The course deviation between the sensors Heading 1 difference limit and Heading 2 is greater than the limit set in TECDIS 102 exceeded Pos sensors difference limit exceeded MONITOR AUTOPILOT Danger OBJ Chart license expired Check license status Dynamic licensing update deadline Dynamic licensing out of credits ALARM ALARMS Setup Only for Track Control The course deviation between the sensors Position 1 and Position 2 is greater than the limit set in TECDIS Setup Only for Track Control TECDIS has lost serial communication with the monitor TECDIS has lost communication with the autopilot Only for Track Control Own designated object with da
85. D BIAG AAFZ 44F0 1020 6235 4DOD AZOA 6C41 6E50 BE73 4CA4 5443 4D64 8693 1D2ZD 1427 1B9E 3503 OB 71 FD73 DAL f f BIG Y 9069 BIZE 2935 630E 1020 6235 4DOD AZOA 6C41 6ESO 963F 14E3 ZBAS 3729 Z8FZ 4F15 B073 OC49 D31B 28E5 C764 1002 564D B959 95B SCF 800E DS4E 3548 67B8 ZBB9 S97B 1582 69E0 IG y 79FO C4F4 SZEB 1776 1CCB 9EB7 7CSB 7EFB 963F 14E3 ZBAS 3729 28F2 4F15 B073 OC49 D31B ZBES Trust Selected C764 1002 564D B959 95B1 SCFS 800E DS4E 3548 67B8 2BB9 597B 1582 69E0 79FO C4F4 926B 1776 1CC8 9EB Delete Selected PEs EES Load Certificate 10 The cer tificate information is now displayed in the S63 Chart Loader and authenticity confirmation remains When the contents of the columns Certificate contents and Public key text file match they are shown with green backgrounds A confirmation of 100 match is dis played when the text MATCHES over the columns turn green Telko Chart Loader v2 00 Load Charts Licenses View Logs Certificates Installed Certificates Certificate Contents MATCHES Public Key Text File f f BIG p f f BIG p FCAG 82CE 8E12 CABA 26EF CCF 110E 526D B078 BOSE DECB CD1E FCA6 82CE SE1Z CABA 26EF CCF 110E 526D B078 BOSE PRIMAR not yet trusted O8F3 AE16 17AE O1F3 5B91 A47E 6DF6 3413 C5El ZEDO 899B DECE CDIE B4AZ OSF3 AE16 17AE O1F3 SB91 447E 6DF6 151 BDC4 3EE 3759 2E17 3413 CSE1 ZEDO 899B CD13 ZACD SOD9 9151 BDC4 3EE7 3759 2E17 B6Al 26D9 346E 36CS BIG q 962E DDCC 369C BASE BBZ6 OEE6 B6Al 26D9 3
86. E EG 266 B 3 1Activation of Pirate option AA 266 an ende GISDIAY RE OR OR N OE EE N EE N EE 266 B 3 3Adjust the viewing of piracy data DA 267 OTST errie e EA DS aaa a ana Far AS oat nee DE ED EE ADS 267 MA PA 267 B 4Autopilot Track control EE EE GE GEE ee 269 B 4 1Autopilotmode EG GEE 269 B 4 2Sensor surveillance and error tolerance ES SS SG GE eee cece eeeeeeeeeeeees 270 B 4 3TECDIS TCS operation u ccc cence GE EE EE EE EE ee 271 B 4 4Activating Heading Control mode eee cece GE aa an2 an 2 2 B 4 5Activating Track Controlmode 22222 c occ c cece cece cece eee c cece ee ceeeeeeteeeteseees 272 B 4 6External Remote mode GEE ee 273 Be SPEC DIS kevpad ii EE RED DE GE DE DE Ee AG EG EG TENE E 274 Bem Piel AA AA 274 BUS EP oh AAO AA 275 soel ee Ge eie ie ig RA EO AE OE N ET OR ER N N 277 B 5 4Navigating your TECDIS with the keypad GEE 277 BS KLUNI AAN OL EE EEE ATE E E E O E 278 B 5 5 1 Alternative numerical functions _ 2 2 02 e cece cece cece eeeeeceeeeeeeees 278 D 5 6 User defined Keys ss EE AE ok wea wrod Ee EE AG GE ED GE 279 BONO SILC INIA ae a aa SE SE EE NG ES EE RE EE EG N GE Ee RE SE oleae 2 9 BGEUPUNG RELOLS AA 281 Appendix C Frequently asked questions 285 C 1Why isn t my route activated EE GE Ge 287 C 2The quickest way to make a route quickroute 33 288 C 3How do keep my TECDIS units up to date 289 C 4How do I turn on T amp P and AlO ESEG GE cece cece ce
87. E dies Sucre ers EG DE EG EE EE 35 2 2 6 Popup windows 2 2 eee eee cece EG cece eee e beeen eee ee eee e cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 35 2 ed An Psst lt 9 ig ee ec eae ee DR OE eee ED EG ER GE EE EE 36 2 5 1 Parts Or tne steen EE ED AE GE SEE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE DE EE EE IE 36 2 32 Own vessel POSITION ss EE SE EER SE DE DR Sindh so ED EE EE asic GE ESE EE EE EE EE Se dp DE 37 2 3 3 Screen light setting Day dusk night o 38 2 4 Tie ifilormation panali se EE AD EED ED EE ASA EG ED EE IE SG EE NN 39 2 3 5 The main toolbar SESSE SS ccc ES GE GE EG GE SG EG SG ee 40 Chapter 3 The chart view _ 00 0 ccc ccc cece ccc cccccccccccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 41 3 1 Moving aroundinthechart e cece eeeeeteeteeteeeeees 43 a BG AA 43 3 1 2 Set chart center visually aka EDS ND kk ES gob ne tee Ban MB a NAG ka DE ee ED Ee 43 5 13 Set chart center fter POSITION SE ESE senses SS EG Re ee ES SS baa GE SE ES De EG 43 3 2 Automatic Chart Centering ee ESE dees AG DE EE EE GE ee DS kh baka Ge Re DE dna Ala 45 CAE SC E res nase EE OE ET EE EO 46 3 3 1 Chart zooming automatic scaling 7 46 3 3 2 Chart zooming with manual scaling GEGEE GE Gee 47 3 3 3 Automatic zooming during route sailing Ee 47 3 3 4 Zooming without changing chart scale c cece ccc GE ee 47 3 3 5 NB Overscale and underscale cece cece cece cece cece cece e cece cece eee E
88. E ee 48 3 4 Chart symbols IHO Presentation library cece Gee 49 3 5 hart presentati n EE kaba a ee hh EE 50 3 5 1 Standard presentation mode STD GE GEE 50 3 5 2 User defined presentation mode USER 2 50 3 513 Full Mazel OS display ss SE SEE SE SE OE DE EE GE MANA AGA BAAL Gately ee na gab nn Gan a 51 3 5 3 1 Full safe hazards on anti grounding alarms 51 3 5 3 2 Daneersvmbel ES ER ie E E E ee 52 3 6 Chart symbols own objects eect e cece esses 53 3 6 1 MOB symbol eventmarker 0 000 ccc cece cece cece EE 53 3 6 2 Openine the symbol MENU ENE EES MA maana aa a 0k msi RE SG EE ED ee EE GEE DE EE aaa 53 3 6 2 1 Selecting and displaying objects symbol line and area EES GES Gee 54 3 6 3 Add new modify or delete symbol object 2 55 3 6 4 Add new modify or delete custom lines areas 57 3 Chart orienta tiO ss ES SE RE EE EE EE ER DE ER DE GE Ee GE R 59 Chapter 4 Navigation EE GE Gee 60 AT Route AA 63 Ad 1 AB WAU OG CTI AA AGO 63 4 1 2 Starting the route planning tool EE RE thara GE WE cane sun DE EE po ED EG GE ES EN DE Ge bee 64 4 1 3 Draw a route directly in the charts EE Ee 65 4 1 3 1 How to change the chart view during route drawing 000 aa 66 4 1 3 2 How to separate a new route from existing routes in the chart view 66 Ak So ie dee ie GEE OT EE EE EO EE EE ER OG 67 4 1 4 Activating the selectedroute
89. ED N SGA EE RS GE asana 94 43 Bear ie HUREUDIS ESEG GEE GE Ee SE IE Ge GE DE OE ME GE Ge EE EE 94 4 3 2 General about EBL VRM operation 20 2 EE Ee 94 4 3 3 Temporary quick route route with route monitoring in three clicks 95 4 3 4 Storage and export of Bearing Position and of Line Of Position LOP 222200222 96 AA AY eer ierdie aa EE EE ER EE ER OE TE TER 98 4 5 Notifications and NA 99 4 5 1 Confirm alarms and warnings EE eee eee cece eee Laa Laana 100 Ns 6 42 0 S oe ae ee PE EE ER ER OOO EO Ka a ne CREO Pee ON EE AR EE 101 ASA Pa COIS rss arsed ED OE EE He Ac ges EE yaaa ESE ER DE EG EE EE AE 102 4 5 4 Warning text EG GE EE 104 4 5 5 Text messages EES NN SS EG EG SE NG EE KG GE SE GE NA kaka 106 A6 Past tackle oe ed aaa RE EE ER AG AE RE DA SE AE Ee Re N eie 107 ALPAMA DOSIUGF SOUS Miss ED ES EE ieee EG Se EE EE Ee DE RED DE SEL DE EE 107 4 6 2 Secondary position source GE GE ee 108 4 6 3 Convert past track to route 108 4 6 4 Show and Hide buttons EE EE SES REED DEE EE EG Ee SE LAKAN Naan NAL NIAN gs 109 4 1 Maritime Cal CUlatl ONS ss SERE ARE EE SE NE HEES AE GO Ee EE EO SE EE GE EO ER EE DE NAA BEREG GE 110 Aa Ore eN GE Te NE Lae MT OE OR OO RE DR OR EE END ET 110 4 7 1 1 Setting calculating position to chart center 110 4 7 1 2 Set apreateirde AA 110 4 11 3 CalCUla lien OF UIE EES EDS AAS A R Ee EE OE EE DS EE EE EE SE 111 4 7 1 4 Datum cc 111 4 7 2 Lines of
90. ES EE IE EE NANANA KEAN ES RE AN EE ANNA LALA LAGE NANANA KANAL EE 71 A 1 10 Vovase planne NE AG N EE EE EE a a aa AA AA aaa A 79 4 1 10 1 Changing values in the waypoint list Default values eee cece cece eee ee 80 4 1 10 2 Changing values in the waypoint list single waypoint 5 53 eee 80 4 1 10 3 Edit waypoint route information 20 2 2 GE GE anaana ooon oonaaa 80 4 1 10 4 ETA calculation during route planning 81 4 1 11 Saving and exporting a route list ESEG e cece cece ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeees 82 A RLZ EXNGN a AA 82 4 1 13 Modify waypoints directly in the charts 83 4 1 14 Merge routes EE cece cece GE a i 84 4 1 14 1 Save the new mergedroute O 84 Galo Ere AANO Ka 85 ALIG Gredt AA 85 EMS O a AN 36 4 1 17 1 Change index line length u GEGEE GEE 87 4 1 17 2 Deleting and restoring index lines EE cece cece a 87 4 1 18 Display sightlines EE Ee 87 4 2 Route navigation EE EE ESE EE SEE EE GG GE KGG kk NG NN EG SA NA AN a kk ska kakakain 88 4 2 1 Navigation information GE GE GE 88 422 al Aa Na AA 90 4 2 3 Route name text field ooo SS EG SE SG SG SG SG ee ee 90 4 2 4 Calculation of the voyage duration GEE EE EE 90 4 2 5 Primary and secondary routes 91 4 2 6 Notify Waypoint Critical Point on the voyage 2 0 2 0 GE GE Ee 91 4 2 7 Hazards and alerts on a route SS GEGEE ee 92 4 SEB lel VR Belle ei ens ee RS Ne SG EN Ge ee DS DE SE nanga GE
91. EY oO Network A new window appears Here you need to select where you want to store the User Permit file Select the location for the Service Key TECDIS 7 Press OK to save the file on the TECDIS Service Key 8 Close the S63 Chart Loader remove the TECDIS Service Key from the unit and repeat the process on the other TECDIS units 9 Send all User Permit files to your chart provider together with a con firmation of which chart areas you want Cell Permits for Contact your chart provider if you need advice about which chart areas you should purchase TECDIS 6 1 4 1 View your User Permit In the 563 Chart Loader in the Licenses tab you can press the 2 About button in the bottom left corner to open a new window with the User Permit displayed in clear text TECDIS Telko Chart Loader Version 2 00 Copyright 6 2008 2012 Telko AS All Rights Reserved User Permit CD76 DBO7 AESC DIFC DE54 0386 3536 This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http Avww openssl org This product includes software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com 144 Chapter 6 Chart installation and maintenance 6 1 5 Standard chart installation with S63 Chart Loader ENC charts are installed in the S63 Chart Loader program The program is aa bundled with all TECDIS installations Loader A shortcut to the program is found on the Windows desktop If
92. IG GPS2 Heading 1 HDT IP2 192168 0 233 2001 Gyro Heading 2 HDT IP2 192 168 0 288 2001 AIS Water speed VHW IP2 1921680 233 2001 Log Radar arpa1 TIM IP2 192 168 0 233 2001 Radar 1 Activate IP server port 2000 Radar arpa2 TIM IP2 192 168 0 233 2001 Radar 2 5 Radar cursor 1RSD IP2 1824680788 2001 Radar1 Ip Serial port activity Radar cursor 2RSD P2 1924680238 2001 Radar 2 Baa Ma KA NN NN NN N AIS Alxxx P1 192 168 0 71 50000 AIS Depth DPT IP2 192 168 0 238 2001 Sounder Received data on selected port Test blear Log Rel wind MWV IP2 192 168 0 233 2001 Wind Route RTE WPL P2 192 168 0 233 2001 RTE Monitor ctrl Hatte Com2 9600 Main display Alarm ctrl Digi Alarm central Controlunit Rcu18 Furuno keyboard Trackcontrol GNS Simrad AP80 Navtex NRX Simulator Camera Curr Current Night Nav By selecting Activate conning IP server port 2000 opens a TCP IP server in TECDIS for data transfer to TECDIS Conning program This option should only be activated when TECDIS Conning displays the data from TECDIS 224 Appendix A TECDIS Setup A 3 3 Supported NMEA sentences TECDIS supports communication with external equipment using the following NMEA sentences as specified by the NMEA standard and IEC 61162 1 Ed 3 0 NMEA sen tence ABK ABM ACK ALR APB BBM DBT DPT DIM GGA GLL GNS HDT MTW MWV OSD RMB RMC ROT RSA RSD RTE THS Description AIS AIS a
93. LE FORCE 7 OCCASIONALLY GALE FORCE 8 WES GALE FORCE 7 OCCASIONALLY GALE FORCE 8 WEST OF OKSOEY OUTER SKAGERRAK TODAY FT OF OKSOEY OUTER SKAGERRAK TODAY FRIDAY AND THE NIGHT BETWEEN FRIDAY AND SATURDAY WERIDAY AND THE NIGHT BETWEEN FRIDAY AND SATURDAY WESTERLY STRONG GALE FORCE 9 Short Keep Print NavtexDig Rogaland Rogaland TODAY FRIDAY AND THE NIGHT BETWEEN FRIDAY AND SATURDAY WESTERLY NEARHE NIGHT BETWEEN FRIDAY AND SATURDAY WESTERLY NEAR GALE FORCE 7 OCCASIONALLY GALE FORCE 8 WES GALE FORCE 7 OCCASIONALLY GALE FORCE 8 WEST OF OKSOEY OUTER SKAGERRAK TODAY FT OF OKSOEY OUTER SKAGERRAK TODAY FRIDAY AND THE NIGHT BETWEEN FRIDAY AND SATURDAY WERIDAY AND THE NIGHT BETWEEN FRIDAY AND SATURDAY WESTERLY STRONG GALE FORCE 9 shart Keep Print 134 fe fst 9 if GAY Id TONG 220612 a2 Hide Jers 68157719 N Asats 010 31 907 E G0G 037 5 4 HOG 2 038 0 SOG 10 0 kn STW 10 5 kn Cursor 36 02 021 N 05 Pos 062 45 848 E DPTH AOO m Tide Windt 0 1 m s 206 C New 66 hr All and the Chart installation and maintenance In this chapter you will find the procedures for installing and maintaining your charts TECDIS In this chapter you will also receive important information about chart licenses and chart correc tions 6 1 I
94. N Tipasse Markor info Alle 7 bata Enh Tidslinje Alarmer Show Subscription Configure Connection Start Download O When a weather model is selected the download window Will include a number of new options In the Select Parameters field you can choose between providing a list of weather variables that can be selected pressure tem perature wind rainfall swell and waves In the Period field you can select the forecast period in days In the Resolution field choose the update frequency of the data points Again the data for each time point between the data points will be calculated A smaller value results in more frequent updat ing of data points and will result in larger download size When the Include Cyclones option is checked the data on cyclones will also be downloaded together with other weather data This elim inates the need for a separate download for cyclone data In the Area field both the size and location of the area selected to download weather data is controlled and displayed The size in square degrees appear along with maximum size of a downloaded area as allowed by subscription 1 By default the area shown on the chart is used to specify lim its for downloading weather data Area Screen To adjust the weather data area zoom or pan the chart view to the pre ferred range is shown on the chart If your subscription does not allow downloading of data for the entire chart view the
95. No2 N02 Delete Selected Permits PM NO2A8252 1 X 28 03 2008 28 03 2009 Delete Expired Permits NO2A8268 1 X 28 03 2008 28 03 2009 NN9AARN 1 N ANA NNA 28 NANNA About QUIT When all loading has finished a message stating that the Cell Permit 146 Chapter 6 Chart installation and maintenance Loading was successful is displayed Here the number of loaded Cell Permits is displayed Press OK to close this message and confirm loading of Cell Permits 13 The left field of the License tab will now display details of the loaded Cell Permits colour coded by expiry status An overview of all Cell Permits installed on the unit is found in the file Permits txt in C Program Files TECDISVS63SYS 6 1 5 2 Deleting Cell Permits If you want to delete a cell permit that is done from the Licenses tab Select the cell permit you want to delete and then press the Delete Selected Permits button 6 1 5 3 Adding S63 charts S63 charts are encrypted and is delivered oin a CD DVD or can be downloaded to a usb dongle The chart provider delivers two types of chart media BASE and UPDATE If you have received both and you are loading charts for the first time you have to add BASE first then UPDATE unless another procedure is stated by the chart providor Forgvrig er det kartleverandgrens instruksjoner som gjelder med hensyn til hvilken rekkefglge UPDATE CD ROM eller DVD ROM er legges inn i Note that the first chart loadin
96. Position LOOP EE EE EE EE 112 4 7 2 1 Register observations 112 4 7 2 2 Features of the LOP tab occ cece SS ee ee 113 Chapter 5 Other functions cise EE EE ee Ee ee BE GE Da DD kan PLAN ha 115 AE VER CURSOR EE AE a mak ba EE SR GE EG EE a an AA ABAD DA a 117 5 1 1 The chart inspector window 2 Ge 117 5 1 2 Inspecting past tracks routes own symbols etc Gee 117 5 2 Conning and anchor watchu EE 119 5 2 1 Conning display for mooring Uu 119 5 252 COMMING Afchoreuard ts SS kana ES DINA GG ANG Padi GE ahaha pd haha OE ANDUN LIGAL aai 120 5 3 ARPA and radar targets oo a a a PG Ga De ee 122 5 4 AIS operation EE EE EE EE 124 5 4 1 Displaying AIS information from other vessels aa 124 5 4 2 Displaying AIS information from own vessel 126 5 4 3 AlS Broadcast messages ie hot EE SEED NING BA kha NATA NANA NAA LENG ER EG Sonat ois eae ANN EG AE ASA 127 5 4 4 AlS direct messaging to selected vessel GE GEE 127 SAS Ada ae SE OLA ee ae AGE paaa BUG aha Ba PNU SAna a a ee n Eh sah nana dn 128 S4 S Basit eed ALO AA AA 128 5 5 AlS vessel Monitoring aaa 129 a Ko CA 130 ER EN ie MOER AE N IE AO OE EE N abno OE ER OE IE OE ton cade 130 5 62 NGAUN EE ES RD EDE GE ut RO GE AUN GO GEE PG ER ES GED NE BES 131 5 6 3 Tidal forecast points for ebb and flow EE 131 5 7 Dead Reckoning Mode ESEG GE L ALLAD L ALLAL ALAA aa nanaon ann 132 SBA EE AA EDE EE 133
97. Ras AIRARE Airport When selecting this you open a dictionary in a new Er Pama g IE pa ACHARE Anch window listing INT 1 abbreviations for chart Sr Fe ode o bj ects BCNISD Beacon isolated danger BGNLAT Beacon lateral BENSAW Beacon safe water i BONSPP Beacon special purpose general BERTHS Berth BRIDGE Bridge BUISGL Building single BUAARE Built up area BOYGAR Buoy cardinal BOYINB Buoy installation BOYISD Buoy isolated danger BOYLAT Buoy lateral Radar overlay setup This option will enable the Radar overlay and display the radar overlay setup panel Note TECDIS Radar Overlay is made to play against Furuno Radar FAR 2107 2807 series Primary TECDIS computer chart secondary TECDIS computer chart and connected IP based collection devices must be configured with IP addresses in 172 31 xxx IP address space to receive data from the radar Radar This value determines the Radar overlay correction Radar 1 3 radar system to be connected This Heading 16 CH EE number must match RADAR NO value in the Setup menu for Furuno radar Heading bearing This sliding controller is used to adjust the radar orient ation relative to the chart display Range distance This sliding controller is used to adjust the radar range so that it matches the chart display 189 Chapter 7 System settings 7 2 7 Installed Charts on the computer Under Chart Utilities field in the Setup menu fo
98. S Setup Do the following 1 ot a 10 Insert a TECDIS Service Key in an available usb port in the TECDIS unit Wait until the text label Servicemode appears in the lower right corner of the chart view Exit TECDIS Start TECDIS Setup Go to the Chart installation Misc tab Press the Start C Map Chart Manager button The C Map Chart Manager program starts Select the database you want to delete by clicking on the entry for it in the Registered databases table Press the Unregister database button The database is now deleted Close C Map Chart Manager and TECDIS Setup Start the TECDIS program 170 Chapter 6 Chart installation and maintenance 6 5 Chart Licenses There are several ways to administrate chart licenses in TECDIS Supplier base Type Tool NE name Jeppesen PRIMAR These use license keys that are admin Jeppesen SENC ENC and Pro istered in TECDIS Setup or in C Map fessional Chart Manager These use Cell Permits for licensing Navtor Nautisk S63 This is administered in S63 Chart Forlag and others Loader These do not use any form of 557 licensing The charts are loaded in 563 Chart Loader e Read more a6 1 5 Standard chart installation with 563 Chart Loader see page 145 rmits in chapter Standard chart installation with S63 Chart Loader e Read more a6 5 2 Chart licenses Jeppesen SENC see page 172 chapter Chart licenses Jeppesen SENC 6 5 1 View your chart licenses in
99. S57 chart databases In a database containing imported S57 data is selected in the dropdown list the Remove Dataset button will delete the selected chart 181 System settings In this chapter we will look closer at the various system settings that can be set in the TECDIS program J L Settings MENU ESE OIE Na dung baet aaa DE N ED DB DE 185 7 2 The Setup menu oaaao aoaaa naaa aaah eeeeeeeeeeeees 186 7 2 1 Ship draught ESEG e cece e cece cccceccceeeeeeeeees 186 72 aN r 2 ER EE EE EE OE OE OE N 187 7 2 3 Time zone adjustment GEE GEGEE 187 7 2 4 NMEA input status 187 7 2 5 Navigation position offset 188 1 2 6 Ehart UUES 2352 4 EE ES AYA kaa a AA pbb ER ana ra NG ka 188 7 2 7 1nstalled Charts on the computer 190 7 2 8 Alarm volume 220 22 SEGE cece eee e cee GE EG 190 Para 191 7 3 The Chart menu aaao SG GE GE Gee 193 7 3 1 Chart information 2 SES GE SS ee 193 7 3 2 Seleetable laye Seanet Ge ED oe EE BNG 194 7 3 3 Chart presentation anann annannaanaanaanaannannanna 194 7 3 4 Overview of available chart information 195 7 3 5 Chart data information 196 7 4 The Shipmemu EE 197 7 4 1 Ship symbol offcenter 2 2 2 ESEG GE EG ee 197 7 4 2 Auto sensitivity DL 197 7 4 3 Viewing the double circle 2 2 ESEG GEGEE ee 197 7 4 4 View vessel Contour u GE ee 197 AA OU SO O AA ANA SE EE DE GE OG AA GE Natan 197 7 4 GROT CU
100. TIONGIY AA 189 7 2 6 2 Radar overlay setup ESEG GEGEE cece cece cece eeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeetetetess 189 7 2 7 1nstalled Charts on the computer GEGEE 190 ARN AA 190 Ta OLA ee AE TE EE NO EE E EE OT N EE 191 72 9 E1 and F Akey setting Ses SE GE DE EE EE Gate SE GE DS GE GE GR GE EE EG 191 F AA lie SE EE NE EE N ON EO N N OE REK 193 1 GI NG LAGA AA SS GESE EE GE LE a Ae ins cae o alee 193 7 5 2 Selectable layers site EE DE GE EE DE DE SERE EE EE Ee EG ee a GE Ie EE Ga 194 HS Chane resente Ee hee sie te en dae eet ER tes tee 194 7 3 4 Overview of available chart information 00 2000 2 cece cece ccc ce cece GE SG Ge 195 723 5 Chart data lMrOrmMa ON es EE EE sani EP EG EG tas NN OE EG onde ie 196 TA diie Ki AA GN DEE 197 LAASNIp symbol oftcenter a ha ie bee EE ES ER ER Eg ee ee EE EE aa SE EE ER EE AG 197 7 4 2 Auto sensitivity DL 197 7 4 3 Viewing the double circle GEGEE GE Gee 197 TAA View vesel GONLOUI ie es ES SEE EE KA EE EE EE ER DR TANG ER EG OE EE EG SR ER EE maacis 197 AA 197 AO ROTCURNE AA 197 LAT AUO route activa iON sesen a aa a a a eines 197 KARA AA HA 198 7 5 The Data menu SG ec araa aada ceeceeeeeeee taaa cence cence A AEAEE EAA Eann o oeenn erenn rennen 199 ASL FUNCION Ao EE EG OE NA EE EG E E 199 7 5 3 Restrict selection data type RA Sct EE Ee EE EE DE BG tend EG Re EE NG 200 Ty Ad AREA ORE ME RO EE OE EE saab eae EE EE ae 200 7 5 5 lmporting primary and secondary rou
101. The route will be shown with a red line in the chart view If you press the route 2 button and then select draw a route this is ir then set as secondary route and will be displayed with a dotted orange Wa line in the chart view QO You can switch which of these two routes are primary and secondary This is done with the route switch button 1 2 Only the primary route can be activated If you switch routes while in voyage mode you have to confirm that you want to cancel the active route Then you have to check and activate the new primary route as described earlier Transfer of primary and secondary routes to another TECDIS unit When two TECDIS units are installed together and set up correctly with matching IP addresses the last selected route both primary and secondary are automatically transferred to the other TECDIS unit and will be available as Import data Route organizer The route selection button opens the route organiser tool This toolbox is primarily used to sort search through and select routes It is also used for export and import of CSV export only and LST files In addition all routes in the route organiser are now displayed in the chart view 75 Chapter 4 Navigation 4 1 8 1 Route selector and route search There are three ways to select routes elg navn id TEE test rute 1 tjome 1 0 eI Use the route dropdown list with sort activated The list can then be so
102. To the left in the window a date list is displayed Select the date in the list that corresponds to the update you want to review 4 The S63 chart loading log will now be displayed The window can be enlarged if needed 150 6 1 5 5 Chapter 6 Chart installation and maintenance Considering authenticity information In the authenticity information field a calculated trust factor is displayed in the headline A trust factor of 0 3 is considered low while a factor of 4 5 is considered medium A trust factor of 6 10 is considered high and does not require any manual consideration assessment If the trust factor Confidence of authenticity equals O it is not possible to load the supplied charts The trust factor is to be used by the navigator to decide if the chart media is authentic and can be trusted to originate from the chart provider A detailed overview of how the trust factor is calculated and the criteria for the different assessment points is given in the table on the next page Value Line 1 0 2 4 7 Text in the Load Charts tab Explanation Does the chart CD contain a signature for each chart and have these signatures been verified by the chart loader No certificates verify ENC sig natures data authenticity can not be con firmed ENCs are signed with included data server certi ficate ENCs are signed by XXX confirmed with trusted certi ficate ENCs are signed
103. VE O oro EE PRE ne AG RO EE DE ED EE tet bas as 197 7 4 7 Auto route activation 197 FAO MVhieelovelr EE ES SEE AG tp ie inden dae BO anand 198 7 5 The Data menu EES SS GE SG cence SG ee 199 5 FUNCION AR OE EO EE OE N 199 7 5 2 Restrict selection time area EE Ee ee 199 7 5 3 Restrict selection datatype e cece eee eee ee 200 7 5 4 Execute occ eee ence ee cee eee GE EE EE ee Ee Ee 200 7 5 5 lmporting primary and secondary routes _ 200 7 5 6 Route synchronisation EE 200 183 Chapter 7 System settings 7 6 The AA 203 EE OS io RR ER N GN N 203 7 6 2 Visual Replay ESEG cece ecececcceecceeeeeeeeeees 204 765 AS sl da Kc DE ES OR ee EE RE ER Pr eee RT 205 7 6 4 Delete Old Log Data 205 7 6 5 Screenshots AY 205 7 7 The Safe menu SS SG SG SS EG ei 206 7 7 1 Safe Deep and Shallow 22 2 2 2 2222 cece cece eee ee eee 206 7 7 2 Check time and angle anti grounding parameters 207 7 7 3 Auto Safe Hazard display setting 208 7 7 4 Camera control formerly FLIR 0 22 eee cece ee 208 AS ANA 209 7 8 The AIS menu ESE SG e cece cece ee eeeeeeeeee 210 728513 DISPIAY TOR RE EE DE EE dds hte ee AE 210 7 8 2 Lost active targets ES EG GE Ge 210 7 8 3 Danger CPA all Targets EE EE eee eee ee 211 7 9 Monitor calibration EES GEE GE e eee eee ee 212 7 9 1 Controlling the monitor contrast 212 2 9 2 ChEck the
104. Vise Navn Dato history Past track lines selected with the query M Tidsmek 6 min cursor is displayed in red in the chart view NG Fra 1 januar 1990 Til E januar 2005 The Past track menu is divided in four Etter 1 januar 2005 The button to open the past track tool menu is in Cla J the main toolbar This button gives access to the Total 124 tracks 2499 5 NM past track lines of previous voyages Velg MEEN E X e Primary pos source gives you control of the Sekund r pos giver Vise Synlig 1t 12t past tracks generated by the primary position sensor age rute fra track e Secondary pos source gives you control of the Ok Maks avvik O 1Nm past tracks generated by the secondary pos yi Su ition sensor e Convert past track to route e The Show and Hide button control the display of the tracks you have selected M Tidsmrk 6min 4 6 1 Primary position source The Primary pos source field enables display of the previous routes Past Tracks from primary position sensor The selected Past Tracks can be displayed with name if previously entered using the query cursor chart inspector and the performing date If the Timemark feature is selected the Past Tracks are displayed with time indicators You can set the interval at which these are displayed next to the checkbox Which past track to display in the chart view is selected by settin
105. a necessary for the paperless navigation and involves no extra work for the navigators 176 6 5 4 4 6 5 4 5 6 5 4 6 Chapter 6 Chart installation and maintenance Billing Based on the actual chart use Jeppesen Marine will charge the vessel operator for accrued chart license This can either be done at regular intervals or when the total outstanding amount exceeds the credit limit defined in the Subscription Agreement All matters relating charts licensing of charts and chart subscriptions is between Jeppesen Marine and vessel operator Use of Dynamic Licensing in TECDIS After Dynamic Licensing agreement draft between Jeppesen Marine and ship operator the function is automatically enabled in TECDIS when then next chart update is completed The chart is automatically licensed within a specified distance from your vessel This ensures chart coverage in the vessel s current position and that the route planning or fake chart requests do not result in Chart License costs The status of the Dynamic All O licenses are dynamic License credit limit last ki a 1 dynamic licenses Dynamic Licensing Range NM B usage report and the next GhartOB at reporting date can be monitored by opening the License list in Check chart licenses option in the Setup menu and click on the dynamic license entry in the list Once the credit limit is lower than 200 credits or the deadline for the next reporting is
106. a network switch NB NB Do not use crossover cable directly between TECDIS units 3 LAN adapter used for connecting the TECDIS units should not be reconfigured to use an IP address outside the 172 31 xxx xxx 255 255 0 0 subnet 4 For the replication to work the TECDIS unit has to have different license dongles eTokens NB The method for Automatic Route Transfer is pre installed on TECDIS units manufactured after November 1 2008 It is not possible to activate route synchronisation on more that two TECDIS units at the same time Manual route synchronisation When the manual synchronisation is used and a route is active on one or both TECDIS units a backup route is copied to the other TECDIS unit This backup route is not automatically included in the route list on the receiving TECDIS unit but it can be imported when needed The following routes can be imported from the Data directory C Program Files TECDIS Data e Primary route ReceivedPrimaryRoute lst e Secondary route ReceivedSecondaryRoute lst To import a route select Copy IN From File in the function field and press the execute button The open dialogue now opens and you can select file type and location Select Import data file type and then select ReceivedPrimaryRoute or ReceivedSecondaryRoute from the File name field Automatic route synchronisation When Automatic Replication is enabled then all the new routes changing routes and routes deleted au
107. ab Press the Add Cell Permits button Select Cell Permit to load 2x File name Folders FEE K Fe oo e ecdis 1 kas Velg korrekt katalog og filtype slik kartleveranderen oppgir Network A new window appears Here you navigate to the location your chart provider has announced your cell permit is placed If the Cell Permit is not in the txt file type remember to select the correct file type in the dropdown list to display it Press OK when the desired Cell Permit is selected Press the Add Cell Permits button again If the Cell Permit file contains the identity of the chart provider loading of the Cell Permits will start automatically and you can go directly to step 12 in this procedure If the Cell Permit file does not contain the identity of the chart pro vider a dialogue will appear In it you can select you chart provider from a list and press the Select and Continue button If the chart provider is not listed you can use the Use the following data server code field Check the box besides it and enter the data server code in the field two digits and confirm by pressing Select and Continue List files of type Cell Permits T ext File Generate User Permit Cell Name Edition Add Cell Permits NO2A2804 1 X NZ TELKO 69 Chart Loader berg Cell Permits NO f Valid 903 N02 Cell Permit loading successful Permits loaded 903 Expires in 30 days 0 N02 Expired 0
108. access to a tool for easy generation of a license order summary that you can send to Jeppesen Certificate for chart providers Certificates are used by the S63 Chart Loader to verify signatures and authenticity of chart cells and chart media Two certificates from IHO and Primar are preinstalled in TECDIS If charts from other hydrographic offices chart providers are to be used it is strongly advised that the certificate from the chart provider is installed before you start the chart loading process S63 Chart Loader requires two files to install a certificate e a CRT certificate file e a txt public license key file These files should be acquired from your chart provider They should both be named with the chart providers name in capital letters Use the following procedure to load the certificates 1 Place the certificate files from the chart provider in a TECDIS Ser vice Key and insert it in a free usb port 2 Start TECDIS to Windows desktop Service Mode Start the S63 Chart Loader program 4 Goto the Certificates tab A s73 5 Telko Chart Loader v2 00 Load Charts Licenses View Logs Certificates Installed Certificates Certificate Contents MATCHES ff BIG p BIG p FCA6 82CE 8E12 CABA 26EF CCF 110E 526D B078 BOSE DECB CDIE FCA6 82CE BE12 CABA ZEEF CCF 110E 526D B078 BOSE B4A2 OBF3 AE16 17AE O1F3 SB91 A47E EDF6 3413 CSE1 ZEDO 899B DECB CD1E B4A2 OSF3 AE16 17AE O1F3 SB91 A47E 6DF6 CD13 ZACD
109. ailable at http telko no site support D 2 2Connection tests for internet Make sure the internet connection is activated D Approved TECDIS installations configured with direct internet access must have on of switch for internet Verify that you have access to the servers e http distribution c map no n e http datacenter c map no e http datacenter jeppesen com These are all opened in Internet Explorer Connection OK The error is in your DNS settings mo If E failed you can connect to the servers with their IP addresses http 80 239 21 75 http 80 239 21 103 Connection OK The error is in your DNS settings G OT F failed check that the firewall does not block you connection 301 D 2 3Connection tests for emall H Check that the answer mail has not been placed in the spam folder Try a lower max size for attachments in the different function menus J Make sure you are not trying to send load old files Only update one unit at a time If both are updated at the same time it is easy to mix the files 302 Appendix D Troubleshooting D 3Troubleshooting 63 Chart Loader Each time the S63 Chart Loader is unable to load charts an error message is displayed The table below explains the different error messages Error message Format error loading installed cell permits Failure to access cell permit storage No eToken detected SSE 11 Cell Permit file not found Load the pe
110. alarm has been examined the alerted areas in the safety zone will also be marked in the main chart view Antigrounding alerts Alert object type Depth _ chart 0 5 to 10 ENC Alerts EA 2 0 Show By entering the alarm list and selecting one of the notifications a separate list of anti grounding warnings is shown When clicking a warning in the anti grounding list the selected danger zone will be marked in the chart with red markings and the chart will center around it 98 4 5 Notifications and alarms A range of situations will lead to events where TECDIS generates alarms warnings or notifications These alerts are displayed in the lower right corner of the screen All alarm and notification settings that are set in TECDIS Setup are set from the tab Specification This area contains Tiome Kobenhavn I a warning field with large text WP ende fart som na Il system status field with counters for DTG 991 NM alarms warnings and notifications In the ETA 98 06 56 lower right corner of the system status Turn WP field the show button gives access to the CTS 1330 102 complete list of active warnings and DTC 0 25 NM alerts TTG 0 min 445 ns The list of active warnings alarms and notific XTE Dev ations shows which notices that require confirm 0 070 141 ation from the navigator If there aren t any AP mode Heading ctr active notices in need of confi
111. an select if a route leg should be a great circle leg or a loxodrome leg This is changed by left cliking in the GC column for the starting waypoint of that route leg A requirement is that the route leg has to be longer than 300 NM If great circle leg is selected the symbol in this field will be a curved line in edit mode and dotted line in finished active mode The colour of the symbol will also set the security status having the same colour code as the route corridor 85 Chapter 4 Navigation The Great Circle route generate additional waypoints on the table which are intermediate waypoints on the Great Circle This means that the Great Circle is recorded as a series of Loxodrome route legs Such additional waypoints can not be modified in the table and are automatically removed if the route leg presentation is switched back to Loxodrome route type 4 1 17 Add index lines When a route is is fully drawn and the route hazards and alerts have been reviewed and accepted Index Lines can be added for even safer navig ation An Index Line is launched by first selecting the Index line button function from the Route Planning Toolbar then move the cursor in the middle of the Route Leg and left click to release an Index Line The Index Line is displayed in magenta colour and is parallel to the Route Leg from which it was generated The Index Line now follows the cursor movement and while still parallel with the Route Leg
112. and select the chart correction you want to change Open the Setup menu tab and select Manual chart corrections in the Chart Utilities dropdown list Press one of the following buttons Endre attributt Endre geometri A The Change Geometry button for changing position data for the object a 6 ENG 7 Endre geometri Save Angre NOAEOBOI Pont lat CS a 5 Extrasel 6 59 01 069 N 10 26 314 E amp Wreck 7 59 00 993 N 10 26 183 E Added 26 09 2011 11 28 10 Updated by Ove Brathen 8 59 01 044 N 10 26 068 E gt Moved 26 09 2011 11 31 47 Updated by Ove Br then 9 59 01 137 N 10 26 150 E 10 59 01 196 N 10 26 265 E Marker Henne Fz e The TAB key and Shift TAB moves the cursor between lat and lon for a point 166 Chapter 6 Chart installation and maintenance e The Enter key sets a new position after the marked pos ition e Arrow up and arrow down keys move the cursor between positions e The Insert key inserts a new position in front of marked position e The Delete key deletes the marked position B The Change attribute button to change the attributes of the object Endre attributt we Angre Value of sounding Category of wreck Information Object name Scale maximum Scale minimum Marker Henne Verdi gt M e Select the attribute you want to change in the list and insert the desired value in the Value f
113. and selectable if L O P functionality was used to determine the position on the selected date Clicking the DR fix button opens a log of completed performed positional decisions with all associated observational data All log files can be saved or printed Visual Replay Replay voyage button opens a Replay window where earlier voyages log data can be simulated on the chart showing own ship AIS and Arpa Target position for the date and time specified Show Positions button opens the view of the situation on the chart as it was at the chosen time Start button starts replaying the situations as specified in the log with 1 minute interval Use DR option allows Dead Reckon Mode for positions between each saved minute and vessels will be shown with new calculated positions every second Replay speed is set with the slider at the bottom of the window Click on Replay voyage button again to stop the playback of a certain earlier plot and return to the present situation 204 7 6 3 AIS ship data 7 6 4 7 6 5 Query AIS database button opens up the possibility to make queries against a vessel database where all previously received AIS targets are stored under a name and registered with MMSI IMO Call Sign and date of last reception from the vessel Enter the name of the vessel when the window is opened then click on the Enter button Last date for stored location is displayed on the Date butto
114. and the vessel will move true movement When the chart orientation is set to Head the vessel will have a fixed position on the screen while the charts move relative movment 37 2 3 3 Screen light setting Day dusk night The colours displayed on the screen can be adjusted for different lighting Dag conditions The screen light dropdown menu is found to the right of the STOP button on the main toolbar By pressing the text or the arrow besides it the dropdown menu will open Select the screen lighting option that suits the conditions with the left mouse button The selected configuration will remain visible in the dropdown menu when it is closed for quick review of the selected mode For optimal lyssetting m ogs skjerm justeres for lys og kontrast Dersom skjermen er for m rk kan dette begrense synligheten av informasjon spesielt ved bruk av kveld og nattlyssettingene Lysstyrkekontrollen p skjermen har en markering for kalibrert verdi See 7 9 Monitor calibration see page 212 for more inform ation 38 Chapter 2 The basics 2 3 4 The information panel Informasjonsvinduet pa hgyre side av kartbildet har forskjellige felt 1 2 3 O Dato og tid topplinjen Sensordata for navigasjon GPS gyro log Marker info markgrposisjon peiling og avstand fra skip til mark r Ved a klikke Pos kan kartet sentreres inntastet valgt posisjon Ved a klikke BRG T kan peiling
115. art installation and maintenance 6 1 Installing chart databases 6 1 1 Chart databases can be installed in several ways in TECDIS Standard method of chart installation is with S63 Chart Loader All charts that are compatible with TECDIS can be installed in S63 Chart Loader Some charts can be installed easier quicker in TECDIS by using our quick installation e Charts from Jeppesen ENC Primar amp Professional has quick installation in TECDIS Setup e Charts from Navtor with the Navstick service has quick installation in the S63 Chart Loader e Charts from Nautisk Forlag with the Neptune service has quick installation in the S63 Chart Loader In the following subchapters you will get an overview of the different chart installation methods Quick installation with Jeppesen SENC charts If you use charts from Jeppesen C Map TECDIS offers a rapid chart install ation in the TECDIS Setup program This procedure is the same for e Jeppesen ENC e JeppesenPRIMAR e Jeppesen Professional The procedure is as follows 1 Insert a TECDIS Service Key in an available usb port in the TECDIS unit 2 Wait until the text label Servicemode appears in the lower right corner of the chart view 3 Exit TECDIS 4 Insert CD or usb dongle with the chart database that you want to install in the TECDIS unit 5 Start TECDIS Setup 6 Go to the Chart installation Misc tab 137 10 11 Jf Copy Chart Database to Harddi
116. ata source uses a different version The S63 Chart Loader supports S63 data format version 1 0 and 2 0 of the S63 standard The specified Cell Permit file uses a different version Although the S 63 standard specifies that the chart cells should be signed by the IHO in the current practice this signature is done by the chart suppliers themselves This message informs the user about this and should not be considered a failure Verify that the specified location contains an S 63 data source Contact the chart supplier to obtain S 63 chart media according to version 1 0 or 2 0 of the S 63 standard Contact the chart supplier to obtain S 63 Cell Permit according to version 1 0 or 2 0 of the S 63 standard 306 Appendix D Troubleshooting The IHO certificate is loaded but is not verified for authen Inspect the certificate and confirm the authen ticity ticity accordi6 5 3 Certificate for chart providers Certificate has A certificate is loaded see page 173 Map Update ENC Update CD not yet been but is not verified for trusted authenticity SA digital certi ficate has not yet been trusted 307 D 4Troubleshooting Weather overlay This chapter provides some guidelines for troubleshooting connection errors for the weather overlay and contains a list of error messages and descriptions of their cause and or solution D 4 1Connection errors For any problems occurring during the download o
117. ayer super imposed over the chart This layer is activated in the Chart menu by pressing the Layers button Trykk pa den INTE Pn LUNA AONO A ARI HUTANA BAHHEHLABBHHH To PC Es 293 3 Now the Layers window appear Here you select the activated chart databasem and mark the box besides C MAP Tides a p L wi 1 N und and overview charts 4 Jeppesen Tides is now activated and ready for use By pressing the Tide button on the information panel now the tidal window will open and show the tidal information for the closest tidal station Tidal stations are displayed in the chart as follows MID OM IE few meres Nae ANU UN a GHRREEP An APOG 294 Appendix C Frequently asked questions C 6 How to transfer system configuration When you exchange or upgrade to a new TECDIS unit you can transfer all system configurations and settings from the old unit to the new This is done in the following way 1 Before the old unit is disassembled insert the TECDIS Service Key in an available usb port 2 Then start and stop the TECDIS Setup program once When you do that the system automatically generates a T setup xxxxx tsz file con taing your configuration The file is automatically placed on the TECDIS Service Key a on Remove the TECDIS Service Key from the old unit Disassemble the old TECDIS unit and assemble the new TECDIS unit Insert the same TECDIS Service Key in the new unit Op
118. bject by selecting the name or directly clicking on it in the chart Circular areas are selected by clicking on the circle center mark Selected objects appear highlighted in the chart and the print button in the dialog window is activated and can be used to create a position way point list for the selected objects This list can be saved to external media or printed if a printer is connected 54 Chapter 3 The chart view 3 6 3 Add new modify or delete symbol objects x By pressing F7 or Edit Symbol in the Mariner Objects window a new vertical toolbar appears on the left side of the chart display The top three buttons functions Delete object symbol F Change Move object symbol and Add new symbol The rest of the gk buttons enables the use of different objects symbols and colors Delete symbols enable Delete function mode by clicking on the 5 Delete button The button will now be activated while the deletion mode is active Delete individual symbols by clicking the left mouse button with the cursor over the icon To exit the Delete function mode click OK or right mouse button Change Move symbols enable Edit Move mode by clicking the Change Move button The button will now be activated while the modification mode is active By clicking the left mouse button with the cursor over a symbol on the chart this will be changed moved and or colored to currenly selected symbo color in the verti
119. ble chart information see page 195 193 Chapter 7 System settings 7 3 2 Selectable layers 7 3 3 Supplementary Data Fi Some chart databases contain information in selectable layers These layers are accessed for G MAP Tides tidal heights and streams display by pressing the Layers GMDSS areas button in the chart menu This opens DIE L improved background and overview charts a new window with selectable C Terrain data gridded layers At the top of the window you U Temporary and Preliminary Notices select the database you want to Piracy Information activate deactivate layers for The layers that are available is as follows S63 GB PRIMAR ENC Professional Temporary and preliminary notices as Admiralty Information Over lay N Improved background and overview charts oe i C MAP Tides X X GMDSS areas X X SAR regions X 7 X Terrain data gridded X oe X Piracy information X X Listen over er ikke utt mmende og det kan vere andre lag tilgjengelig for din TECDIS installasjon Chart presentation In the field at the bottom of the chart menu tab you can select between S52 and INT1 chart presentation With INT 1 selected a warning will be shown stating Not official view With the arrow buttons to the right of INT 1 you can adjust the size of text and symbols The magnification factor is displayed besides the arrows Se kapittel 4 7 for mer informasjon og illustrasjoner 194 Functi
120. bol library Open symbol selection with the sm a 8 folder icon First select the symbol that will be replaced in the toolbar Then select the new symbol ba ka ies eS from the symbol library by clicking it The new NG ah Md B symbol will now appear in the toolbar Close dd 5 NN 9 symbol library by clicking the folder icon AE SC IE Velg f rst det symbolet som skal byttes ut fra aaa AA verkt ylinjen Velg sa det nye symbolet fra symbol A OR biblioteket Symbolet pa verktgylinjen byttes da Ka BE automatisk ut Lukk symbolbiblioteket ved a trykke N f E F p mappesymbolet 6 color selection buttons These buttons show color choices available symbol colors The selected color appears as a activated button The above mentioned functions only works with symbols added by you Symbols placed in the charts by the chart provider cannot be edited 56 Chapter 3 The chart view 3 6 4 Add new modify or delete custom lines areas By pressing F8 key or Edit line Area in the Mariner objects window a different vertical toolbar appears on the left edge of the chart display This toolbar provides access to functions that enables the creation modification and deletion of lines and areas on the chart Toolbar function ality is the same type as in the previous chapter Position list Gives an overview of the different positions for the points the line are is made of You can also edit the point placement by inserting
121. bols lines areas in given positions When a symbol line or area is selected for placing f 58 45 569 N 009 45 493 E and you have selected which colour to use simply Mad Mi Save a enter the position in the Pos window and press the Chart Center button Press again on the same button 1 NSEW Lett Right now called Save Exit the window by pressing the OK 7 g g button a 6 AA Chapter 3 The chart view 3 2 Automatic Chart Centering TECDIS can automatically ensure that the chart is oriented so that own vessel always is visible the chart is moving according to the vessel This function is activated by clicking on the Auto button on the Main Toolbar the Home key on the keyboard or by clicking with the cursor anywhere in the Sensor Data field in the Information panel Auto chart switch is Off Auto chart switch is Off but Auto function will remain active when zooming with mouse clicks in the chart area Auto chart swich is On until zooming with mouse clicks in the chart area Auto chart switch is On and will not be deactivated when zooming with mouse clicks in the chart area Setting the Chart Scale and zoom level by using the Zoom buttons on the Main Toolbar will NOT turn off Auto mode Locking the Auto mode is done by clicking Auto with the right mouse button Auto sensitivity how often shall the chart view be redrawn to keep up with the vessel movem
122. bs e a Calculate Tab which is a maritime calculator e a LOP Tab Lines of Position which is an interface for entering manual positions using bearing and or distance observations 47 1 Calculate In the tab Calculate you can make Luuc x maritime calculations based on AN pang Fra Distanse og peiling Til e a From position and 58 62 506 N RL 0 000 NM 000 0 5852506 N e data for Distance and bearing mmogsgE lt ec 0 000 NM pooo fo1008 167 E Or Vispakart meter ret 180 0 Vis Senter a To posi tion Kartsenter Kalkulere Kalkulere Tid 110 01 2012 Fart 10 0 kt 110 01 2012 14 09 27 min oos 14 09 27 Datum Wes 84 wes 84 J If the To position is known all fields in the Distance and bearing field will be filled with correct data when you press the Calculate button in the area where the data is calculated 4 7 1 1 Setting calculating position to chart center The position fields also have a feature where the position is set to the center of the current chart view This can be used by pressing e the Chart Center button in the From field or e the Center button in the To field The position is then set automatically 4 7 1 2 Set a great circle route In the Distance and bearing there is a selector button for great circle route GC and loxodrome route RL The distance values can be specified either in NM or meters 110 4 7
123. but can be accessed by moving the pointer to the top of the monitor The presentation library is closed by pressing the Esc button on your keyboard You can view the version number of the presentation library by pressing the button chart legend button in the Chart menu See chapter 7 3 The Chart menu see page 193 49 3 5 Chart presentation By pressing the two buttons STD and USER you can easily select or change STO USER between two types of chart presentations ECDIS Standard or user defined SSE lee vale Peb STD displays the official standard presenation for ECDIS S52 This is a standard set by IMO with certain colours symbols and contents see the illustration to the left The image to the right displays the use defines INT1 chart presentation By pressing the STD button IMO defined present ation is displayed and Auto Mode is activated the chart is centered on and follows the movements of the vessel 3 5 2 User defined presentation mode USER The USER Mode displays the customizable chart Log Safe Ais presentation The configuration is done in the Chart Setup Chart Ship Data menu tab Layers Text generic The largest field of the Chart menu shows all options for chart display You can include information in the chart view by selecting it in the Chart menu if you remove the selection the information will be hidden C Deep s
124. butor of TECDIS Head Office Aalesund Furuno Norge AS Visitor address shipment address Sjgmannsveien 19 N 6008 Aalesund Postal address Servicebox 11 N 6025 Aalesund Telephone 47 70 10 29 50 Telefax 47 70 10 29 51 Branch Office Deep Sea Furuno Norge AS Visitor address shipment address vre Fyllingsvei 81 N 5162 Laksevag Postal address vre Fyllingsvei 81 N 5162 Laksevag Telephone 47 55 94 41 41 Telefax 47 55 94 41 51 E mail furuno furuno no Website www furuno no Service Phone 47 99216950 Our service telephone is served when offices are closed
125. button will initiate the Track Control Ap mode Track control mode if the following conditions are met e A route must be selected and activated Th if no route is selected and activated e eThe distance from the vessel s position to the activated route leg must be within the distance limitations specified by the Max lane deviation parameter in TECDIS Setup e The difference between the vessel s course over ground and planned course must be less than the limit specified in TECDIS Setup for Max course deviation e The vessel s speed must be greater than the one set in TECDIS Setup for Min speed If any of these conditions are not met the cause will be communicated to the operator If the distance from the position of the vessel to the route leg is greater than this limit when the route is activated TECDIS TCS will ask the operator to specify the first WP for route monitoring When a WP is selected TECDIS TCS will set up a temporary route leg from the vessel position to the starting point This can be edited if needed 2122 Appendix B Optional add ons B 4 6 External Remote mode When the autopilot is set to External remote mode a dialog box is displayed in TECDIS showing the current Heading Set Course and Set RoT Set Course The current Set Course can be adjusted in three ways e by either turning with the left mouse button the wheel situated under Set Course displayed value e or clic
126. cal toolbar The new symbol will move with the cursor until is placed in the desired position by clicking the left mouse button again the previous position and appearance of the symbol will be marked as deleted To exit the Edit Move mode click OK or the right mouse button Add New Symbol enable New Symbol mode by clicking on the New Symbol button The button will now be activated while the mode is active In this mode a new icon symbol will be placed on the chart with the selected shape and color from the vertical toolbar by clicking left mouse button in the desired position A window will open in the lower part of the chart Information about the new object can be introduced here This is stored as a short visible text displayed in the chart and as a detailed text not visible in the chart Click the left mouse button or the OK button when data is entered to close the window OK NO BOB UAL EP IR KERE HOON BE OK This button will terminate any of the three active modes described above If none of the modes are activated this button will exit the symbol menu 17 Symbol Buttons There are a total of 17 icons available in the toolbar where the currently selected symbol is marked as inactive Note The top four symbols are fixed cannot be changed and will always be presented in orange Open Symbols Selection Symbols other than those Y found in the menu can be accessed from the Sb D A SG sym
127. caled Automatic zooming during route sailing For version 4 7 x 19 and above it is possible to configure automatic zooming to given scales for each waypoint in a route This is done in the voyage planner by adding the following shortcode in the text field of the wanted waypoint Scale 1 xxxxx where xxxxx is replaced by the wanted scale Zooming without changing chart scale The zoom buttons on the main toolbar can be is vi 900000 7 used to change the scale the chart is viewed 2J IE ar in If you use the Zoom in or Zoom out buttons 47 2 2 EL with the left mouse button the chart view automatically changes so that details are viewed using the most appropriate chart database If you use the right mouse button on the Zoom buttons the details will be viewed using the chart scale last used before you zoomed in or out The number in the centre shows the current scale appear showing you the original scale for the currently shown chart By clicking in the field you will set the current chart scale to the displayed original scale If you hover the mouse pointer over the middle field a yellow helptext line will This function can be overridden by charts from another chart database TECDIS uses several types of charts but will always prior itize official charts NB Overscale and underscale When the lowest scale available in the chart database is reached you can still zoom further into the chart but this w
128. can also be set with the AC Rain controller on the Furuno RCU 018 if connected s212 7 9 2 Check the colours Check the colours produced by the monitor by opening the T test image This is a colour test diagram Check that all diagonal lines are clearly separated from the background e 3 yellow diagonal lines e 4 orange diagonal lines e 3 magenta diagonal lines e 4 green diagonal lines e 3 blue diagonal lines e 3 grey diagonal lines Ed Ed df Control the visibility of each color in the test diagrams A to E If the monitor fails this test it no longer satisfies the color calibration require ments for the use of ECDIS and must be evaluated by qualified personnel to be adjusted repaired or possibly replaced NB If the monitor settings have been changed manually in the monitor s Setup Menu or to make sure that the correct values are used recalibrate the screen This can be done from the Setup menu by going to the Auxiliary dropdown menu and selecting Recalibrate screen salos This blank page is automatically inserted where appropriate to ensure that new Chapters begin on a recto page In this chapter we will look closer at the system settings that are only available in TECDIS Setup A 1TECDIS Setup ataglance ee 217 A 2Service mode EE SG cence eee eecccceeceeceeeeeeeees 218 A 2 1Entering service mode during system startup 218 A 2 2Entering service mode when
129. can use the AIS target list function This tool gives you a table of all AIS targets withi n range ae AIS target list is opened by right clicking the AIS button The table can be sorted by the following criteria AIS Target List x i CPA Dist CPA Time e Name A Z 8 2 min o Hiblang closest vessels First ere eg TE e CPS distance closest vessels first IcebEAM 8 4 min PS time el fic rouped so ROEDFJORD 25 7 min e CPS time closest ab 6roup CHILEAN REEFER 16 58Nm 15 14Nm 27 9 min that all vessels coming towards sm 13 45 Nm O 36 6 min LOS 112 7 67Nm 2 43 3 min own ee is snow first saa ER EET To change which criteria the table is TORMO 18 40Nm 9 55 7 min SOUTHERN AGTOR 18 58Nm 9 58 8 min sorted by click the heading of the maang AETA PP wanted column The selected criteria BASTOE 27 09Nm 1818Nm 70 9 min i l SKJARBARDSTJENESTEN 752Nm 5 56Nm 28hr will be displayed with blue text in the table When you have found the vessel you are seeking you can show the information in two different ways 1 Right click on vessel name in AIS target list to open the AIS inform ation window for the vessel 2 Left click the vessel name in AIS target list to open the AIS inform ation window for the vessel and display the AIS target centred in the chart view 5 4 5 1 Static mode When you scroll down the list it will automatically enter static mode In that mode only AIS target information is refreshed no
130. ccessed by right clicking the icon 34 2 2 5 2 2 6 Chapter 2 The basics Both the primary and secondary function associated with an icon is displayed in the help text that appears when you let the pointer hover over the icon Some icons are connected directly to a specific tool function while others are connected to a menu for a specific tool group such as the route tool menu Dropdown menus Seilte track Dropdown menus are opened by clicking the small Prim r pos giver Yee T Nevn Tato arrow icon on the right side of the dropdown v Tidsmrk 10min Menu Choose between available values by left clicking the desired value Arrow keys and the enter key on the supplied keyboard can also be used Use the tab key to switch between function fe Fra 1 mars 1990 Til 1 januar 2005 Etten fama T EIE fields sd jma ti on to fr Is sn 2 In dropdown menus for date selection a calendar Total F 45 6 7 8 3 will appear as illustrated Right and left arrow are 1 12 8 14 15 16 mao g7 B18 20 21 22 29 used to cycle between months By clicking the res 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 month name you will also be able to select the at month in a dropdown list OI dag 30 09 2010 To change the year simply click on the year displayed and select using the displayed up and dawn arrows Months are selected by clicking the right and left arrow or by selecting from the
131. ce ESEG c anaana a aa naD e cece cece cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 217 A 2Service mode Es SE EG EE OG EE GE EE EE OS Re EG GO AA GE GE EG oases 218 A 2 2Entering service mode when TECDIS is running 2 2000 e cece eeccccccccceeeeeeteeeeees 218 AN MIA Data ER i RE a EE ale EE laag baa nanan es deel ag nb aie ea SS N BG Ka EE ee Ee css 219 A 3 1NMEA Input 6 oo GEES Es EE DE nananana nanao anoano a DNA SR GE Ge EG ee RE ED eg SE EE haaa EE Ee 219 Aile led SEEN EN EE ED EE EG EE ee N DE Ee 220 Ped 12 NMEA SEMENCE APA 220 AI IMPUC DONG ie or aron fond Na naa Ge AE ED EE cinta Sot ut sd EE GR EG RE SG ES ED ER EE ori he 221 IP OOF E RE EE EE a ER N ER EE OE EE RE ON ae 221 A 3 1 4 The Baud TPA field EE EES 221 A 3 1 5 Serial port activity SE GE Ge 222 A 3 1 6 Received data on selectedport 3 222 A 3 1 7 Other COM port connections EE e cece cece c ccc ceeeeeeeececceeceeeeeeetttteeceees 222 A 3 1 8 COM port for Monitor ctrl ua 223 A3 1 9COM Bort TOF Alarm Ctl ES NG bA LAYLAY EE Ee bangkal SE Ge hada moa EE SE GE EE E 223 A 3 1 10 COM port for Furuno Keyboard RCU 018 L A 223 A 3 1 11 COM port for CAM control EE Gee 223 AS 2NMEA OUtDUL i s GEE ER Ge SE RE GEE DE EG halal ko hog GE GE DE DS haha Ge EE DE Ee GR EE Ge 224 A 3 EF ADINE IP SETVE GE ED AR ca EE EE DA ee ES ED oe AE N De 224 A 3 3Supported NMEA sentences EE GE GE GEE aan aan 225 A 4Vessel settings Specification EE EE SS SS SG ee e
132. ce the secondary source is automat ically used If the secondary source also fails the TECDIS system automatically change to Dead Reckoning Modus Log Gyro When switching primary position sensor from position 1 to position 2 COG 1 and SOG 1 will be switched to COG 2 and SOG 2 in the information panel Navigation position offset Ing Setting Position DEUT button opens a spa Pos 0 000 N window at the upper right corner of the chart display E where a fixed value for position deviation can be offs 0 000 E El entered The vessel representation will be adjusted automatically when you change the position deviation value In some areas old chart positions are somewhat offset to WGS84 datum It is possible to compensate for this type of error at the TECDIS system entering a position offset To close the window and disable the position error click again on Setting position deviation The system will then utilize the primary position sensor again Chart utilities Most of the functions available in this dropdown list are explained in chapter 6 Chart Installation and Administration They can be found on the following pages e Chart library see page 179 e Manual chart corrections see page 163 188 7 2 6 1 72 6 2 e C Map chart update see page 154 e Check Chart licenses see Chart Licenses on page 171 INTA Dictionary Fil R e ae INT 1_ Describti INT 1 Dictionary ADMARE de area Named a
133. ce and bearing field and enter the appropriate values for distance and bearing Click on the Cal culate button in the To field to calculate the To position e Calculation of distance and the distance between two points Move the chart center to the first position by clicking with the middle mouse button with the cursor over the desired place and do the same with the second point Alternatively you can enter values dir ectly in the fields of Lat and Lon Click on the Calculate button in the Distance and bearing field to calculate both loxodrome great circle distance and routed distance e Calculate the time spent on a voyage between two points in a given speed Move chart center to the first position by clicking with the middle mouse button with the cursor over desired place in the chart and do the same with the second point Alternatively you can enter 111 Chapter 4 Navigation values directly into the fields of Lat and Lon Add Speed value in the field Time and the time it takes for a voyage between two points is shown in the box below Convert a position to WGS 84 datum Choose the datum which the known position is stated as in the Datum field and enter position val ues as above Change datum to WGS84 in the lower Datum field and the position is then converted to the WGS84 datum 4 7 2 Lines of Position LOP If it is determined that both the primary and the secondary position sensor fails or produces the wrong position you can
134. ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 290 EN TE EEE tn eae Meee EITE AEAEE EEA eee ed eA ORE RCT ER DE N GE 290 C 4 3Admiralty Information Overlay AlO EE EG 291 C 4 4Manual chart corrections ESE e cece cece cece ee eee eee c cence cece ence eeeeeeeeeeeneeees 292 GSHOW CO NG CtIVAlE TGCS argc EE SE GE GE EG GE E S EE EG EE EES EER EE SE EE se ee Ge 293 C 6How to transfer system configuration GEE GE EG GEE 295 Appendix D Troubleshooting CO 297 D Trrobleskootinig serieral ENE DEEG a na De DS DE O BANA EG DE NE 299 D 2Troubleshooting connection issues EE GEGEE aaan 301 BEA Geer OSG ss RE EE EE EE EE EO AE AA EE EE EE AE EE EE EG 301 D 2 2Connection tests for internet ESEG cece eee cece cece cence aoaaa aiian 301 D 2 3Connection tests for email SESSE e cece cece eee GE eee cece EG SG ee 302 D 3Troubleshooting S63 Chart Loader O 303 D 4Troubleshooting Weather overlay 2 2 2 cece cece cece ccc ceccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeees 308 a Ke a 308 D 4 2Error WESSAEES OE SE i As ee DE SG EG GE GE Ge a 308 This blank page is automatically inserted where appropriate to ensure that new Chapters begin on a recto page Introduction Introduction This user manual is intended to give you a basis for using the vessels TECDIS unit in accordance with good maritime navigation customs and the governing rules and regulations We recomment that all users of TECDIS attend an IMO approved ECDIS course
135. cece cece cece cece eeeeeeeeeee 134 5 8 3 0lder messages EG EE a GR haaa 134 5 8 4 Show messages cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 134 116 Chapter 5 Other functions 5 1 Query cursor The query cursor is a general tool in TECDIS with multiple functions o depending on which tool you use it together with In common for all use areas is that the tool gives information beyond what is normally displayed It s name is derived from it s main function to display extra information about elements you select with your cursor when the query cursor tool is activated the cursor changes It now displays both a cursor and a question mark Now you can left click any point in the chart view and a chart inspector window will appear 5 1 1 The chart inspector window While the query cursor is active a click anywhere in the chart view will open the chart inspector window at the bottom of the screen The cursor position is displayed in the window headline The left part of this window will give a list of all chart objects near the cursor position The first entry in this list gives details of the chart cell the objects are connected to Each entry is marked with a symbol indicating if the object is a point line or a geometric area Entries that have been changed or added through chart corrections will be displayed with symbols with yellow backgrounds Selected object center at 59 01 260 N 010 26 470 E X Extrasol ENC Attrib
136. central part of the chart is prioritized 2 By pressing Select on Map button you can override the default setting for selecting weather data area The cursor changes and the first corner of the rectangle is set out in the map by pressing the left mouse button Then you can set the diametrically opposite corner with a new press with the left SLIL B 1 5 Appendix B Optional add ons mouse button Press the Select Screen button to return to the default display area The estimated download size appears at the top of the window and is updated at any time according to the current selections Adjust the model selection parameter selection site selection time period and resolution to the desired compromise between detail and the download size Typically a download size of 5 8 MB provides more than enough detail but normally requires a broadband connection For other connection types carefully consider the costs associated with data download along with the usefulness of the information weather data can provide When the settings are implemented weather data is downloaded using the same procedure as for the subscription download Controlling the Weather overlay on the chart The main window for EE gt controlling the weather EI 28 06 2012 lloz 00 00 Na gt gt po EE eee rrr Ty overlay can be divided into as AE YATA PAA De Ge ee Ge De ee Ge ee ee 08 07 2012 01 00 00 B Alarmer 4 Syldorer e the Upper sec
137. cified position Next menu page Toggles between the menu pages Toggles between the day dusk and night monitor Day Dusk Night color modes 192 7 3 The Chart menu 7 3 1 The chart menu is also described in chapter 3 5 Chart presentation see page 50 In the chart menu you set the configuration for chart presentations such as e Which information is displayed in the charts e How information is displayed in the charts e What additional information layers are displayed in the charts Chart information In addition to two predefined chart information Log Safa his modes you can select three user definable Setup Chart Ship Data information modes In the second lowest field of the chart menu you select between these 5 Layers information modes _ Text generic L Text other Safe hazards o m OU L All depth contours Danger symbol e B base gives a chart with a minimum a visible chart objects and configuration options e S standard gived the same chart view as STD mode but with full display of dangers and all dangers within the safety contour e The modes 1 2 and 3 gives the user access to setting display of chart objects Do this by checking the box besides each entry o 1 Grid lines _ Lights character Lights cursor info Active lights Active lead sectors 2 852 NT1 eto Read more about the chart information in chapter 7 3 4 Overview of availa
138. corner of the sliding controller are the start and end time for the forecast downloaded Note If the cyclone data is also loaded these often start earlier than the weather forecast and some times the start of the sliding controller only shows cyclone data Display Controllers The buttons in the middle field of the window for weather overlay controls the data to be presented in the chart The buttons for the selected and visible weather data is displayed as pressed down here Wind Pressing the selectable buttons toggles the display of this type of weather If a button is gray here Clouds and cyclones it means that the selected weather model does not contain this type of weather Kao skyer The system optimizes the way the selected weather appears EEAS kioner while preventing that the Weather overlay display is too C2 Regn sno complex If only one type of weather data is selected it is displayed in several ways simultaneously For example waves are shown using both colored areas region contours and direction arrows If several types of weather data are selected TECDIS display the different weather data with different display forms For example when Waves 254 B 1 6 B 1 6 1 Appendix B Optional add ons Pressure and Wind is selected simultaneously Waves are shown with the colored areas Wind with arrows and Pressure with contours Alarms and Cyclones have unique display forms and display of these
139. data for example Wind Speed of 20m sand Total Waves Height over 6 m When an alarm condition contains more than one type of weather an alarm condition will not be activated before all the weather data that has alarm limit has been exceeded 260 B 1 14 Appendix B Optional add ons An unlimited number of alarm conditions can be added and one or more of these alarm conditions can be selected simultaneously When more than one alarm condition is selected at the same time the alarm condition will be triggered if one of the selected conditions are met It is important to understand the difference between combining several types of weather data in a single alarm condition and choosing separate alarm conditions for certain types of weather Alarm condition Windspeed over 20 m s AND Waves Total Height over 6 m will result in a very different alarm condition than choosing two separate alarm conditions Windspeed over 20 m s and Total Waves Height over 6 m TECDIS assists the operator to indicate the options that are set by marking any other alarm conditions with OR as soon as an alarm condition is selected in the Weather window The timeline feature Weather Pressure 985 hPa PBt NE N rd 17 m S 20 LA B Alarms 4 Cyclones se Clouds Pressure Wind haa Waves 1 Temp TE Rain Snow Iv Alarm Zone
140. ddressed and binary broadcast acknowledgment AIS AIS Addressed Binary and Safety Related Message Acknowledge Alarm Set Alarm State Heading Track Controller Autopilot Sentence 4 B AIS AIS Broadcast binary message Depth Below Transducer Depth Datum reference Global Positioning System GPS Fix Data Geographic Position Latitude Longitude GNSS fix data Heading True Water temperature Wind Speed and Angle Own Ship Data Recommended Minimum Navigation Inform ation Recommended minimum specific GNSS Data Rate of Turn Rudder Sensor Angle Radar System Data Routes True heading and status 225 Send Receive Receive Send Send Receive Send Send Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Send Send Receive Receive Receive Receive Send Receive Receive TIM VDM VDO VBW VHW VSD VTG VWR WPL ZDA Tracked Target Message AIS AIS VHF Data link Message AIS AIS VHF Data link Own vessel Report Dual Ground Water Speed Water Speed and Heading AIS AIS Voyage Static Data Course Over Ground and Ground Speed Relative Apparent Wind Speed and Angle Waypoint Location Time and date Receive Receive Receive Receive Receive Send Receive Receive Send Receive Receive NOTE TECDIS also supports a number of proprietary protocols for specific appl
141. downloaded haa Bolger VI Regn sno Current Details Delete Old Files Import 3 poese Markor info feyk loner 7 6 fats th i Tidslinje Alarmer Download New Press the Data button indicated by a red frame in the image below to extend the Weather window with a data area This area is closed by pressing the Data button again 4 Press the Download New button in the lower right corner of the Weather window 248 Appendix B Optional add ons EKEN ng K A 18 16 08 Una DI Download Estimated Size 27 kb Model Subscription Download weather subscription data 08 06 2007 5 Before first time use the connection has to be configured Press the Configure Connection button pai oo ET EEE KAPPA Aa leun ries Can Brow Flame eks Anis Ca Max Attachment ize fono 6 CE dim mins mee it Internet Update A If TECDIS is set up with an internet connection in the form of a network cable connected to the Internet LAN port on the rear of the computer select Internet in the Communication Type field B There are three connection options in the Connect to Server box and basically you should select the location that is closest to own location If this option seems poor another option should be selected C The Connection Timeout field must be set to at least 90 seconds but 120 seconds is recommended For slow Internet connections a hig
142. dropdown list that appears when you click the name of the month When you click on the desired day date the calendar will close and you have selected that date Popup windows All popup windows that are opened in the TECDIS program can be moved around in the chart view Place the pointer on the header part of the window left click and hold and pan the window to the desired position Windows with the TECDIS icon in the header can be resized by dragging the window borders to the desired positions 35 2 3 The TECDIS screen The TECDIS system starts directly to the chart program The TECDIS screen that appears looks as follows 2 3 1 Parts of the screen The program is divided into three main areas 1 The information panel e Placed to the right of the screen Displays position data and navigation data along with the system settings menus when they are open 2 The main Toolbar e Placed at the top or to the left of the screen depending on the configured setting This is configured in TECDIS setup see A 4 Vessel settings Specification see page 227 3 The chart view e Covers most of the screen Chart symbols routes and past track are some of the functionality displayed here Depending of how you navigate in TECDIS the screen will divide itself in two additional areas 1 The function toolbar e Placed to the left of the screen Changes depending on the activated tool 2 The function window e Placed mainly in
143. e button b ACB AB Normal Safety New Send Ack When you have inserted your message text afa 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 eel press Send to send the message oo fafwfE RTjrfujijojpf To confirm that you have received a message BU APR EI CEL IT press the ACK button oer ve upon gt AIS direct messaging to selected vessel AIS can be used for sending direct messages to MME other vessels The functionality is available HDT WS BOHUS BRG 341 0 Pos 59 00 713 N DIST 5 6 NM 010 25 449 E COG 277 0 CPA 3 04 NM S06 15 4kn TCPA 15 0 min To write a message to the vessel press the M Aktivere _lagre Siette 5 P PA Melding AIS OK Message button to display the message Message to 259158000 a window Earlier messages are available for review through the dropdown list in the upper part of the window from the AIS window of the vessel you wish to communicate with A new message is written by pressing the New button ear Bo AaB ord C Safety New Send Ack aas 4 siel eel sl of ap press Send to send the message The on screen EEEEEEFEEBEEEEF keyboard at the bottom of the window can be DELI used as an alternative to the regular physical keyboard for data input When you have inserted your message text Note messages older than three months will be automatically deleted 127 5 4 5 AIS target list To quickly find an AIS target you
144. e 71 4 1 10 Voyage planner EE ccc cece cc cccccccceeeeeeeeeeees 79 4 1 11 Saving and exporting a route list 2222222 82 4 1 12 Extending a route ES EG pa DEE GESE Ge EE png ma EE DE EE Ee 82 4 1 13 Modify waypoints directly in the charts 83 4 1 14 Merge routes EE GE EG GE Ge 84 4 1 15 Copy selected route EE GEE 85 4 1 16 Great dirde Toute OE abe ote EE ee kababa Anita 85 4 1 17 Add index lines ESE SES SES EG GE EG Gee 86 4 1 18 Display sight lines EE cece ccc cece ceeeeeceeeees 87 4 2 Route navigation 88 4 2 1 Navigation information EES EG SG 88 4 2 2 Larger CTS values 90 4 2 3 Route name text field 90 4 2 4 Calculation of the voyage duration 90 4 2 5 Primary and secondary routes a 91 4 2 6 Notify Waypoint Critical Point on the voyage _ 91 4 2 7 Hazards and alerts on a route SS SS GES See 92 4 3 EBL VRM Bearing 2 2 2 eco cece cece cece oo oaan aaa 94 4 3 1 Bearing functions 2 2 2 elec cece cece eee ccc ccc cccceeeeeeeeeeees 94 4 3 2 General about EBL VRM operation 94 4 3 3 Temporary quick route route with route monitoring in LP SC CNS 5 hata phat N SE ne NG a EE te oben ney OE ER aba 95 4 3 4 Storage and export of Bearing Position and of Line Of Pos WHOM OP AE ORN NE EE N OE EN NN 96 ae Chapter 4 Navigation 4 4 Anti grounding 2 c
145. e as a separate layer for the desired Jeppesen database see chapter 7 3 2 for more information on layers With charts from Jeppesen this functionality is only available from TECDIS SW ver 4 7 2 15 and newer T amp P form Jeppesen is automatically loaded in TECDIS when you load chart updates 4 Selected object at 58 27 899 N GEEIS DataSet Z10W0133 ENC 44 Navigational system of marks Navigational system of marks Coverage 4 Vertical datum of data 4 Depth area Navigational Information Object e Navigational Information Object e Navigational Information Object N Coverage Attributes o Navigational Information Object Object name SEBAAAM U Agency responsible for production Information aMam Unexploded charges on the seabed Expired notices 2011 364 7331T Unexploded charges exists on listed positions AP mode Offline Track Headin Area Charts Year month 21 Alerts FA 1 2 Show hb Open the query cursor and select the chart object you want to inspect The selected chart object is displayed in the chart view with a red ring around it and a Selected Object window appears as displayed in the image above By activating Navigational Information Object in the list the attributes for the chart object is displayed in the Attribute tab in the window Text in the chart view for the different T amp P notices are displayed when Text other is
146. e bar here Chart Projection MERCATOR Ee Vertical datum Mean sea level The version number of the chart horizontal datum WGS 84 Edition date 24 10 2018 core of TECDIS is also displayed Update date 27 03 2014 CMap v5 2 1 23 and your version Edition number 117 of the TECDIS program 4 7 2 23 Update number 5 safety depth 9 The chart database the chart you Safety contour 10 are viewing belongs to is shown at hart database 8 ENG the bottom of the list here ENC shaded in red on the display 196 74 The Ship menu 7 4 1 Ship symbol offcenter las Safe As Here you define how much of the charts are to Setup Chart Ship Data be displayed in front of the vessel when in Auto Own ship offcenter Mode pa This functionality is only available while in Auto a N mode j Auto sensitivity Es a 7 4 2 Auto sensitivity F Shaw double circle Here you adjust the sensitivity of the automatic Show ship outline chart redraw 7 4 3 Viewing the double circle With this selected the own vessel position is Q displayed with a double circle in the charts Course vectors Length 10 min l ROT curved 7 4 4 View vessel contour M Auto route activate With this selected the vessel size displayed in Wheelover 0 a the charts are relative to the chart scale and zoom level Course vector Indicates the vessel course and speed in the charts by a dotted line in front of the vess
147. e down and page up keys on the keyboard to change zoom levels The program will automatically select the appropriate chart type for the selected chart scale The marker will now be moved to the chart centre 46 Chapter 3 The chart view 3 3 2 Chart zooming with manual scaling From the main toolbar you can select the chart scale directly The numbers represent the scale times 1000 You select the scale by clicking on one of the buttons on the main toolbar Alternatively you can set the scale directly from the keyboard using the letter for the wanted chart scale W A B C D E F or G keys 3 3 3 3 3 4 When the letter of the different scale buttons is displayed with yellow text and a green background it indicates that official charts are available at this scale level These official charts will always be prioritized If the system is in auto mode the displayed chart scale is at the position of your own vessel If you manually navigate the charts the displayed chart scale is for the centre of the chart display If your own vessel is outside the chart display the displayed chart scale is for the centre of the chart display The button indicating the presently selected chart scale Under the main toolbar text warnings are Better ENC is available shown for the following situations e No ENC available e Better ENC available e Nocharts are available refer to paper charts e Not official chart display e Over s
148. e ee ee 227 A 4 1More about restoring saved defaultvaluess oe cece cece cece cece cece aaan 230 A 4 2More about T setup TSZ files 231 A 5Chart installation Misc EE GE ee 232 A 5 1More about Monitor Calibration ESE GES SG e ence cence eee ee 233 Ao die eN ARE EE ON ER RE EE BA a 235 A 6 1System licenses TELcahrt License GE EE inannaan 235 A 6 1 1Aetivatine add ONS sd a a N EG a aa GE ED Ge teense 236 A 6 2Jeppesen licenses C Map License SE 00 aaa 236 A 6 2 1 Add license manually 236 A 6 2 2 Get Expired licenses EE aa 237 PCG 23 LICENSE TST NE RE N EE ses toca daw ses EE OE 237 A25 LICENSE Orde SERE ES ech ae EE ins de ED AG GE GE ED N bans DS ER EN GED 238 A 7Track Control Settings 2 239 A 7 1The autopilot field 239 A 7 2The Startin Requirements field GE GE GEE 240 A 7 3The Default values new route field cece cece cece cece eee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeuees 240 PA AOC settNnE SS tected erste SEGE tu ues ata ag DAA kde Bos Ee AE DS ais nA EER GE ES coed Lass 240 Appendix B Optional add ons c cece GE GEE GE Ee 243 B 1Weather overlay ii acs cans ED GE EE aoe Nan oe DE ES a Ee EE 246 B 1 1How to enable weather overlay EE EE EE EE 247 7 9 2 1 Activating the license 247 B 1 1 1 Activate Weather Service subscription cece cece ee 247 B 1 2How to download the Weather Service subscription 248 B 1 2 Download procedur E EER ou nde ust EE EE Ee EE DE
149. e no confirmation by the navigator Events can be confirmed one by one separately by clicking the text in the warning field or by pressing the space key on the keyboard If a Furuno RCU 018 or TECDIS Keypad is connected events can be confirmed by pressing the ALARM ACK key 100 4 5 2 Several unconfirmed warnings can be confirmed at once by clicking in the chart view or by pressing the ESC key 3 times on the keyboard The first key press will bring up the complete alarm list the second key press will confirm all warnings and the third will close the alarm list again Warnings can also be confirmed from an external alarm central if connected During the installation the technician can configure TECDIS TELchart ECS Setup so that the confirmations from the external alarm central closes only for alarm sound or closes when the alarm is actually confirmed Alarm list Alarm list mx ee TY nr Time___ alarmtype Vessel OFF TRACK Active Antigrounding Alarm Active Missing netw connection TECDIS Setup Export Active 13 22 52 Refer to paper charts lAotive Refer to paper charts Active Caution area Active The number of active alarms warnings and alert messages are specified in the notification field By clicking the Show button a window opens with a list of all alerts including information about triggered time alert type and status When the warnings and the alerts are confirmed they wil
150. e subject to certain inaccuracies and deviations that if used carelessly can result in maritime accidents or events which could be followed by the loss of lives vessels and cargo and by environmental damage Hence the navigator should not account solely on one single navigation aid including the TECDISsystem for safe navigating of the vessel The sensible navigator will collect navigation information from several sources crosschecking all information for any possible flaws or deviations when deciding the vessel position course speed and planned route 19 Compliance with Current Standards TECDIS comply with the following standards or other normative documents Version 4 7 1 and higher e Marine Equipment Directive Module B MED B e IMO Resolution MSC 232 82 e IMO Resolution MSC 191 79 e IMO Resolution MSC 74 69 Annex 2 e IMO Resolution A 694 17 Version 4 6 0 to 4 7 0 e Marine Equipment Directive Module B MED B e IMO Resolution MSC 74 69 Annex 2 e IMO Resolution A 817 19 as amended by MSC 64 67 Annex 5 and by MSC 86 70 Annex 4 e IMO Resolution A 694 17 For a current list of software versions compliance with standards and instructions for updating TECDIS software to comply with new standards and regulations refer to the following web page http www telko no site support tecdis compliance 20 TECDIS at a glance In this chapter you will get an insight in what electronic chart sys
151. eactivated for TECDIS systems with Track Control Zone Here you can specify the time zone for the route 4 1 10 2 Changing values in the waypoint list single waypoint Speed corridor width ROT arrival time delay time and waypoint text can all be modified for each waypoint separately even during voyage mode If you set a value to O then it will revert to the default value If another value is set then this will override the default value and be displayed in black You can add values by using your keyboard or by using the scroll wheel on your trackball if available 4 1 10 3 Edit waypoint route information By clicking the text field for a waypoint the following window will appear above the voyage planner 6 ma N From Mame 2 8 4 8 7 8 8 0 Bhs IT Bf 50207 N OW WE ES Talo 01 Course 200 6 020 5 Dist 10 4 Nm Owner fteko as tals dl Fa nl lk 1 Enter visie e isin alll OK Query chart Picture file Gel N look Lt n n Rat 80 Here you can change information about the route waypoint NB If you have selected the first waypoint in the list you will open the route info window All other waypoints open in to the waypoint info window In the route info window you can enter information such as port of destination port of call route owner and a general tag you want to set to get a custom search term when selecting routes To change to the way
152. ected symbol If several symbols are overlapping the information window will contain a tab per piracy symbol When you select a tab in the information window the chart will switch focus to the piracy symbol connected to that tab and this is indicated with the red ring Joas wa 7STO va GG 4 CAKE E in fh 8 me A DF Yt fo to ele ad J EL Ee ingen ENC tilgjengelig 7 Pakistan A A 2 l Ce i f E P x k t X f J ah Nat dib United Arab Emirates Saudi Arabia Oman a gt RT Na gf ies Somalia di Ethiopia Piracy Information Piracy Note 28 05 2012 Armed Assault 18 05 2012 Suspioious Approach 08 04 2012 Hiaok Pa wada E Hide Details Vessel Name Maersk Texas Type General Cargo Ship Flag State USA Time 09 00 apriza ele Select None Incident Types and Hijack Kidnapping 2 F Armed robbery Armed assault Attempted attack Attempted boarding F Theft Suspicious approach 268 Appendix B Optional add ons B 4 Autopilot Track control TECDIS Track control has to be ordered as an optional feature B 4 1 please contact Furuno Norway for more information TECDIS has autopilot functionality and can automatically hold the vessel at a planned COG Track control will work under different circumstances and within the limits to vessel manoeuvrability The autopilot functionality is connect
153. ed to the vessels sources of position course and speed information check with the autopilot manual for how to use and set up the auto pilot TECDIS is approved with the following autopilots e Raytheon Anschutz AP2025 PLUS e Emri SEM200 Furuno FAP 2000 Autopilot mode When TECDIS is connected to an approved autopilot Ap mode Offline and Track Control is activated the Track control Track Headin information window will appear directly above the alarm field in the information panel The possible values in the window are Alerts MA o Show Offline No data is received from the autopilot Manual The autopilot is in manual control mode Heading ctrl The autopilot is in course steer mode ROT control The autopilot is in Rate Of Turn control mode Track Control The autopilot is in Track Control control mode The autopilot is now in External Remote control mode External and an autopilot remote control is displayed on the screen Override Check with the autopilot user manual 269 B 4 2 Sensor surveillance and error tolerance A TECDIS TCS Track Control System has to be connected to e two independent position sensors e one course sensor e one speed sensor The data from these sensors are continuously monitored by the system and alarms will be triggered if data is lost or considered invalid Positions and course data is compared and triggers alarms if the difference in course and position exceeds the limits specified i
154. ed on for anti grounding alarms in the Safe menu tab See 7 7 3 Auto Safe Hazard display setting see page 208 ET 3 5 3 2 Danger symbol The setting Danger Symbol marks any hazard on the chart with a danger symbol This setting is active by default in STD mode and when the Safe Hazards is activated in STD mode all risks including those within safety contour are marked with danger symbols When this is deactivated only isolated dangers outside the safety contour is shown with danger symbols Safe hazards OFF Danger symbol ON Dangerous objects outside safety contour are displayed with danger symbol med faresymboler Dangerous objects within safety contour are not displayed Hazards deeper than safety depth are not displayed Safe hazards ON Danger symbol ON Dangerous objects outside safety contour are displayed with danger symbol Dangerous objects inside safety contour are displayed with danger symbol Hazards deeper than safety depth are displayed normally Safe hazards ON Danger symbol OFF Dangerous objects outside safety contour are displayed normally with black text Dangerous objects within safety contour are displayed normally Hazards deeper than safety depth are displayed normally with gray text NB In STD mode hazards deeper than the safety depth are not displayed regardless of Safe hazards settings E p 3 6 agp PF 3 6 2 Chapter 3 T
155. eee cece e cece cece eee e cece cece eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 172 6 5 2 1 Adding a chart license 172 6 5 2 2 Administrating the chart licenses cece cence cece e cece ececeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 173 6 5 5 Certificate for chart providers nc ES GED EG e edna Ge wien dee Sts Re GE NG 173 65 4 DYNAMIC WICCNSING DES AE KO ES nt NG nana GE NAG Ee EE a a eg ee 176 Ooo a COGIC LE ss AE SIG GE oie N ERGE ates EE GE N a hy ae GER EE GO 176 6 5 4 2 Automatic LICENSING EE EG GE ee 176 6 5 4 3 Reporting user 176 God BINE EG GE GE EE GE OG ES RE E 177 6 5 4 5 Use of Dynamic Licensing in TECDIS EES GE GEE 177 6 5 4 6 Adjustment for automatic ENC licensing 2 cece Gee 177 6 5 4 7 Route Planning using ENC diagrams 178 Aa AA 179 6 6 1ImportiNE 59 7 Cate AA 180 6 6 2 Delete S57 chart databases SS GES GGG e cece cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 181 Chapter 7 System settings 6 eee eee cece eee eee eee LLALLA ALLAL LaaLa 182 Te VSO TUINE SIMON AA 185 2 lie SEG EO vi RA DE GA EE GE eluate Sas DEE EE EG OE IE De EG 186 7 2 CSND draught EE EE GE NEE GE AG weiss erate GE ER EG SE nah bA ba a DANG 186 1 2 lane Uag Er EER AJA MERE a EE a a EE SAAN daa ET 187 7 23 Timezone adjusStMEnt ES EE DE uae EE EE Ge GE GN GE GE GE eb ie 187 1 2ANMEAIDDOLSTALIS RR GEE ee SEN EEUE Ee MEE OKT EER OES EER a aes Be ER AE ee ea 187 7 2 5 Navigation position offset 188 12 6 El U E Sn DE DE ED ee GE DE AA 188 44 6 e 1 DIC
156. el In the dropdown list you select how many minutes of travel at the current speed the line should reach The end point of the line is where the vessel will be after the selected time 7 4 6 ROT curved When this is selected the course vector is drawn as an arc when the vessel is approaching a waypoint with a course change and wheelover is set to a different value than 0 7 4 7 Auto route activation Automatically activates the new route If conbined with Allow route activ ation entry lane in TECDIS Setup a route leg will be placed between the new route and the vessel position as well Default setting for this option is off Read more about route activation alternatives in chapte4 1 Route planning see page 63 route planning 197 Chapter 7 System settings 7 4 8 Wheelover Indicates at what distance from the next route leg a new rudder angle should be given This is an important setting for correct Track Control turn behaviour Select to disable the Wheelover view 198 7 5 The Data menu 7 5 1 Backing up own data is very important Log Safa his Individual data ED te keep ates routes Setup Chart Ship naps tracks symbols information and lines areas Function Copy OUT to file Copy IN from file to TECDIS 2 to TELehart ECS and daily use Delete Det kan ogs v re aktuelt a kopiere data fra en File Info maskin til en annen bade for sikker Restrict selectio
157. elect Updating Log Review Updates which gives you an overview of all changes made to the chart databases C Map CM33 3 update send email update orders to updates c map no x Databases ENG Auto r Updates log Review Updating Refresh Clear Highlight Name Status Number Date l HO MDK Afdeling Kust Division Coast Belgium m GB300777 Accepted 7 29 05 2012 11 31 HO Directorate of Hydrography and Navigation DHN Brazil Rar 68300813 Accepted 4 29 05 2012 11 31 HO The Navigation Guarantee Department of the Chinese Navy Headquarters O R i 3 taka GB300818 Accepted 5 29 05 2012 1L31 HO Canadian Hydrographic Service CHS l puating HO Servicio Hidrografico y Oceanogr fico de la Armada SHOA Chile GB300813 Accepted 6 29 05 20121131 EER i 5 7 HO Ministerio de Defensa Nacional Colombia amp B301076 Accepted 2 29 05 2012 11 31 HO Bundesamt f r Seeschiffahrt und Hydrographie BSH Germany GB30 Accepted 2 28 06 2002 ital HO Kort OgMatrikelstyrelsen KMS Denmark GB301119 Accepted 3 29 05 2012 11 31 HO Estonian Maritime Administration EMA GB301148 Accepted 7 29 05 2012 11 31 HO Instituto Hidrografico de la Marina IHM Spain GRANIAR Arrenterd AR 99h 9017 1121 z Ls afl To see the update log do the following A Select the desired chart database in the dropdown list B The field Updates Log now displays a list of all updated that have been added e Na
158. en TECDIS Setup and go to the Specifications tab 7 Press the restore saved default values button TECDIS TELchart ECS Setup local Ip 192 168 0 137 Nmea Data Specification chart installation Misc Licensing Track Control Ship size m EA lasa Length 99 Beam ago 2 Draught min jaa 2 Draught max aa 2 Safe dpt min 88 Height Conning position sg m from bow 5 4 m center gt starbrd las 2 m height Depth transducer 39 4 m from bow 80 m above keel Name SHIP NAME Position sensor 1 99 m from bow b 4 m center gt starbrd Position sensor 2 58 4 m from bow b 2 m center gt starbrd Radar antenna 1 ks 2 m from bow e 4 m center gt starbrd Radar antenna 2 ks 2 m from bow p 4 m center gt starbrd MMSI xj ver 1 7 22 Other TECDIS station s data export Name TECDIS 2 p 172313 6 Name TECDIS 3 P 172 81 8 62 V This is extra unit 84 planning ete T Radar use true EBL reference M Arpa is conning referenced Monitor size main menu 20 lauto M backward gyro 180 T Allow video display toggle Input E Alarm T Allow Standby Mode T Alarm if HOT1 HO12 2 8 Remote silence only T Allow route activation entry lane Restore saved default values ee Your configuration has now been transferred to the new unit This minimizes the risk for errors and
159. en er 100m og max lane deviation er satt til 2 kan fart yets avstand fra ruteleggen vere inntil 200meter nar Track Control blir aktivert min speed sets the vessels minimum speed in knots The Default values new route field The values in this field is used as standard values when you plan new routes Speed kn sets the standard value for speed in knots Lane x 0 01NM sets the lane width standard value expressed in hundredths of a nautical mile For eksempel vil en verdi i dette feltet pa 10 representere en bredde pa 0 1NM Turn radius x 0 1NM sets the standard value for the turn radius expressed in tenths of a nautical mile For eksempel hvis verdien spesifisert i dette feltet er 5 vil standard svingradius vere 0 5NM Other settings min allowed turn radius x 0 01 NM specifies the minimum allowed turn radius expressed in hundredths of a nautical mile Denne verdien skal framkomme under fart yets sea trials max allowed WOL distance x 0 01 NM specifies the maximum allowed WOL distance the operator can set expressed in hundredths of a nautical mile max Remote Control ROT specifies the max ROT allowed in the autopilot remote control tool in TECDIS expressed in degrees per minute WP warning and alarm time specifies the distance from a waypoint the vessel is when any set warnings or alarms will be generated 240 Appendix A TECDIS Setup Alarm limit difference primary and secondary heading specifies ho
160. endres mellom sann BRG fT og relativ BRG R peiling Ved klikke andre steder i dette feltet kan tekstst rrelsen pa peiling og avstand kes Enhet for avstand kan velges melom Nm og meter ved a klikke MM Knapp for dybde og tidevannsinformasjon fide Sann vindhastighet kan skiftes mellom m s og knop visning ved a trykke knappen Teoretisk og beregnet avdrift basert pa COG SOG HDG og STW Kartdisplay for antigrunnsteting Ved klikke pa Vise menymapper pa hovedverktgylinjen pnes det menymapper nedre del av informasjonsvinduet Ved seiling med aktiv rute vises ruteinformasjon eget felt 10 Varslingste It Utvid knappen til venstre for DPTH feltet apner for A skop dybdekonturvisning med x akse lik dybde og y akse Satt til tid minutter Utvid knappen til venstre for Vind feltet pner for grafisk visning av vindretning i torhold til egetfartey Med knappen verst h yre hj rne kan det skiftes mellom sann CT eller relativ R visning Utvid knappen til venstre for Drift teltet pner for grafisk visning av fart yets avdrift basert p COG SOG HDG og STW 39 80 05 12 12 31 M skill GPS 58 59 006 N Asats 010 33 142 E COG 000 0 HDG 001 6 10 0 kn 11 5 kn SOG STW Markor 59 02 067 N Pos 010 4194 E BRG 1 056 0 5 49 NM v DPTH 696 m Tide slVindr 0 9 m s 002 viDrift O5kn 352
161. ent and Ship symbol offcenter how much of the chart view shall be in front of the vessel can be adjusted in the Ship menu 45 3 3 Chart scale 3 3 1 The chart scale and orientation is visible all the time through the following two elements in the chart display e North arrow indicating the direction of magnetic north when the chart is rotated e Chart scale ruler on the left side of the chart display The scale ruler will change colour based on scale and distance between colour segments units Scale interval Colour Units 1 1 1 7500 Yellow White 0 1 Nm 0 1 1 7501 1 100 000 Red White 1 Nm 1 1 100 001 1 2 000 000 Black White 10 Nm 10 1 2 000 001 1 100 000 000 Blue White 60 Nm 1 If the generation of a new chart display after panning or zooming takes 6 seconds or longer an indicator T for expected generation time will appear in the upper BI left corner of the chart display This indicator will only KIS be displayed on chart displays with extremely high information density Chart zooming automatic scaling To zoom into the chart you place the pointer where you want the centre point of the new chart display to be and click on the left trackball button To zoom out from the current chart display click on the right trackball button The new chart display will centre around the point where the mouse pointer was Alternatively you can use the pag
162. er 6 Chart installation and maintenance 6 3 3 2 Enter manual chart corrections The procedure for adding manual chart corrections is as follows 1 In the TECDIS program open the Setup menu tab and select Manual chart corrections in the Chart Utilities dropdown list A new window appears In this window you perform all manual chart corrections an you gain access to all previous corrections and changes to them The window can also be displayed by using the query cursor tool 6 Professional laany Endre attributt Endre geometri Slette objekt 71441740 Buoy shape 0 e Buoy special purpose Category of special purpose mark lt unknown gt Added 28 09 2011 10 20 30 Updated by Ove Brathen Conspicuous radar 0 Update Information Buoy special purpose general Source of update Temporary from 01 06 2011 until 01 08 2011 NOM Object name Garnholmen Measuring buoy 68 m Marker C spre sd Author of update Ove Brathen Press the Create New button Adder nytt objekt Punkt lt Linje lt Omr de Fortsett Angre Obstructions in general 3 a Snags stumps Ca wellheads a cribs EE PEN T Fra Notice to Mariners Sok Fm Now a new field is opened with an object list Select type of object from the list Alternatively you can search in the bottom right corner of the window If the object you are adding is from Notice to Mariners mark this chec
163. er AIS features such as e detailed AIS information from other vessels e detailed AIS information from own vessel e AIS broadcast messages to all vessels within range e AIS direct messaging to selected vessel To set AIS setting see The AlS menu on page 210 5 4 1 Displaying AIS information from other vessels AIS targets are presented in the chart view as green triangles Non activated targets have smaller triangles and no vectors past track or name MMSI number are shown and they point up in the chart view if information about course and heading is missing Activated targets point in their heading direction and have past track displayed along with heading and course vector The points indicating past track are placed with a 1 minute interval IF The Ship menu see page 197 is selected in the The Ship menu see page 197 then the true ship contour is shown for the displayed targets 124 Chapter 5 Other functions A sleeping non activated AIS target can be activated temporarily by placing the pointer over it This will also display the vessel name MMSI number in the chart view When the pointer is removed from the sleeping AIS target it will again be de activated and appear as standard for sleeping mode AIS targets are displayed with distance CPA and time CPA on mouse hover Note that Danger CPA has to be activated for this function ality to work AIS mal Asmi O O O Oooo O LHDT MS BOHUS BRG
164. er present in SENC 0 13 When the clart loading is complete Import Complete is displayed in the progress window The window will also display loading details The chart loading process is finished by pressing the Return button 14 The loaded charts are now available in TECDIS in a separate chart database TECDIS creates a unique chart database for each chart provider loaded with S63 Chart Loader The database is named S63 XX where XX represents the chart providers Data Server Code Note The chart loading log has to be inspected when chart loading is finished The log contains details of all error messages and warnings Read more in the next chapter 6 1 5 4 Review of the chart loading log TELKO 5 63 Chart Loader v1 02 l o Load Charts Licenses View Logs certificates 27 06 08 19 55 Starting import of Primar BASE CD Issue WK49 07 27 06 08 19 55 Confidence is Low 3 ENGS are signed with included data server certificate 2 Data Server certificate is provided but does not match any trusted certificates 0 Data is provided by a known data server 1 IHO certificate is not provided 0 27 06 08 19 55 CD contains 2065 cells 2050 with valid cell permits 27 06 08 19 55 NO2A0404 000 Decryption 27 06 08 19 55 NO2A0404 000 S57 Verification 27 06 08 19 55 NO2A0404 000 CM93 3 Compilation 27 06 08 19 55 NO2A0404 000 loaded successfully 1 Start the S63 Chart Loader program 2 Open the View Logs tab 3
165. ermore when planning a route C Routes can be adjusted to consider the following options e Ignore ship draft when checked C Routes will generate a route without taking into consideration the own vessel draft The new gen erated route must be reviewed in detail before it is used e Allow river route legs when checked the C Routes will generate routes using inland waterways where it makes sense e Prioritize deep water route legs when checked C Routes generates routes preferably in the open ocean e Allow inshore route legs when checked C Routes can use the fair ways within the shoreline for navigation plan In that case a route can be plotted outside the traffic separation schemes and be shorter e Use default lane width when checked C Routes uses TECDIS stand ard corridor width instead of corridor width from C Routes that are highly variable per leg 72 4 1 5 8 4 1 5 9 4 1 6 SAR Any routes that are generated with Ignore ship draft activated have to be reviewed in detail before they are used Create Port of call list with the on screen keyboard a Lage ny rute med C Routes Fi By Pressing the Keyboard button you Rute navn 20180919 Aalesund Denmark bring up an on screen keyboard This tam gt way vou have easy access to the route lt Sneoifed Position Set y d y Land Denmark gt tol generation tool without a physical o Cs keyboard Restrictions Add De Flere
166. es to take effect 155 6 2 2 Updating charts S63 Chart Loader For correct procedure for updating charts with the S63 Chart Loader see 6 1 5 Standard chart installation with S63 Chart Loader see page 145 S63 11 Updating of charts using UPDATE DVD follows the same procedure as a first install of the database with BASE DVD If you are using Navtor Navstick or the Neptune service by Nautisk Forlag you can use the rapid installation procedure for chart updates as well 156 Chapter 6 Chart installation and maintenance 6 3 Chart corrections TECDIS offers several ways of inserting chart corrections The general method for inserting elements in the charts is with manual chart corrections In addition TECDIS has three semi automatic methods for temporary and preliminary notices from Notice to Mariners 1 Most chart providers include T amp P notices in their ENC charts It is however not possible to separate the display of these notices from the regular chart data Contact your chart provider for more inform ation 2 With charts from Jeppesen you get access to T amp P as a separate layer 3 With AVCS charts from UKHO you et access to T amp P as a separate layer called Admiralty Information Overlay AlO 157 6 3 1 T amp P for charts from Jeppesen In TECDIS you can with charts from Jeppesen get access to temporary and preliminary notices from Notice to Mariners This information is availabl
167. eted Right click anywhere in the chart to exit this mode Secondary position source The field labelled Secondary position source enables display of the previous routes Past Tracks from secondary position sensor In this frame the operator can choose whether the Past Tracks are visible on the chart and for how long time Fo they will be displayed 1 or 12 hours If je Timemark feature is selected the Past Tracks are displayed with time indicators You can set the interval at which these are displayed next to the checkbox The Past Tracks from the secondary sensor position are always displayed in grey Convert past track to route Tecdis has capability to convert a previous track to a sailing route If Allow is ticked a user can select a previous track instead of a route with the cursor A new route will be generated following this track Route accuracy WP density is governed by allowed max deviation 108 4 6 4 Show and Hide buttons When the Show function is selected the Past Track lines that match the criteria in the date fields are displayed on the chart The Show button will appear in the active mode until the Hide button is selected in the Past Track menu 109 Chapter 4 Navigation 4 7 Maritime calculations AA Pressing the Maritime calculations button on the top menu opens the Maritime calculations window in the lower left corner of the screen This window has two functions as selectable ta
168. f weather data regardless of the connection type used TECDIS service partner and or Jeppesen Marine will be able to provide very useful assistance in tracking down the cause of weather download problems Jeppesen Marine s servers have logs that show whether the weather download attempts actually achieved contact with Jeppesen Marine s servers or if the weather download procedure was successful They will also be able to confirm whether the subscription is intact In order to provide help and assistance regarding TECDIS system or chart weather databases Jeppesen Marine or your chart supplier will need your System ID TELKO eT number Make sure your subscription is valid The expiration date can be viewed in the weather window by pressing Data New Download and Show Subscription buttons D 4 2Error messages The following list displays some of the error messages that can be experienced in the weather overlay functionality Error message Description Current weather data lacks This is not an error It is simply an indication that the currently parameters set in active alarm loaded Weather data file does not contain all of the weather conditions Review alarm parameters you have specified in your selected alarm condi settings tions No current weather forecasts This is not an error lt is simply an indication that you have no are available current Weather data files on the system This is not an error It is a message to inform you
169. f you have received a license file continue to the next step 2 If you have received a license code skip to part 10 Press the Add license from file button This opens a new window where you navigate to the location of the license file password usr Select the file and confirm adding it by pressing the OK button All chart licenses for all chart databases and all areas included in your purchased license is now activated You have now finished adding the license If more licenses are to be added repeat the pro cedure Press the Add licenses manually button The field to the right og the button is now opened and you can now set 1 The chart database for the license you want to add in the Databases dropdown list 2 Chart areas for the license you want to add in the Data Set or Area Name Enter the received license code in the License String field Press the All License button Repeat this process for each chart area and each license code in each chart database 172 Chapter 6 Chart installation and maintenance 6 5 2 2 Administrating the chart licenses 6 5 3 The other functions in the Licensing tab helps you in administering your Jeppesen SENC licenses The Get expired licenses button gives you access to an overview of all licenses that has expired within a selected date month and year The Licenses list button gives you access to a list of valid licenses sorted by chart database The License order button gives you
170. fo field to the right of the Customize button at the bottom of the weather window you can specify which weather data to be displayed as text next to the pointer when held over the area with veerdatapunkter Weather information displayed relates to the date selected in the upper weather window e None option disables the marker information e When the Visible option is selected only the values selected for dis play in the chart e The All option displays all the data available in the data set By default this option is set for the Cyclones page e The Timeline option provides a much more responsive method for displaying weather data in the chart overlay B 1 8 Explanations of weather data chart symbols OEE EIN TE ERA et 29 06 2012 01 00 00 03 07 2012 0100 00 Wind knots ka Label with wind speed and direction in form of spd dir ME AA AA kn s10 10 15 0 60 80 10 Tipasse Markor info sykloner n Data Enh Tidslinje Alarmer es eee ee eee By pressing the Button at the bottom of the weather window the weather window expands to include the explanation of the different types of presentations of weather data in the chart Pressing the button again closes the window Which weather data presented are selected in the Show Chart Legend for dropdown menu 256 Appendix B Optional add ons B 1 9 Selection of units for wind speed temperature etc KI 03 07 2012 185547
171. formation on the Send Regis TECDIS unit harddrive The file can now be transferred to tration another computer with internett access for sending to Telko at support telko no Monitor Cal This field reports on the current monitor calibration status ibration and and gives access to methods of updating the monitor cal Test ibration and monitor serial connection diagnostics Start C Map Gives access to the C Map chart databases licensing and Chart Man diagnostics tool for the chart databases in a separate ager program made by Jeppesen s232 Appendix A TECDIS Setup A 5 1 More about Monitor Calibration The correct monitor calibration is necessary to ensure correct colour rendition in the charts To recalibrate the monitor first try automatic calibration by pressing Identify Monitor and Load Automatic Calibration If this is unsuccessful perform a manual calibration by pressing the Manual Calibration Load Calibration File button and select the correct calibration file for the connected monitor If you cannot find a calibration file on the hard drive this can be acquired by support telko no or an authorized dealer The filed Monitor Calibration Status reports the current status for the monitor calibration The possible status reports are given in the table below along with actions required if you experience issues Status Action Connect the monitor to a COM port Perform automatic or manual calibration The
172. g process with a new chart provider can be time consuming and it may even take hours Loading of UPDATE media takes less time For example loading all Norwegian ENC cells will take about 30 minutes to 1 hour in TECDIS depending on hardware Adding an UPDATE CD for the same selection usually takes about 20 to 40 minutes in TECDIS Below is the procedure for loading BASE charts The procedure is the same for both BASE and UPDATE and is as follows 1 Start the S63 Chart Loader program 2 Insert CD DVD usb dongle labeled BASE 147 TELKO Gd Chart Loader v1 02 Bl Load Charts Licenses View Logs Certificates Select Chart CD or Update Location 9 Min datamaskin Lokal disk C VOIXO1 DI se Portable pa Praid 0 ce R drive pa Traid R se drive pa Traid S Se Music pa Praid W gt Kontrollpanel eco Delte dokumenter Mine dokumenter s9 Sonv Ericsson File Manager Ei 3 From the tab Load Charts navigate to the file catalogue My Com puter 4 Double click it 5 A connected drive CD DVD usb appears Double click it TELKO 8 63 Chart Loader v1 02 J m Load Charts Licenses View Logs Gertificates Select Chart CD or Update Location s9 Min datamaskin Lokal disk C lt VOIXO1 D x28 Portable pa Praid Q ss R_drive pa Traid R se drive pa Traid S x28 Music pa Praid W Gr Kontrollpanel ec Delte dokumenter eno Mine d
173. g the time interval in the date selectors Here you can set up two independent intervals One with the From and To date and one with the After date creating an interval from that date until today Alternatively you can select a preset in the dropdown at the bottom of the date field with display of tracks from a period of e a given number of days e a given number of weeks e a given number of months 107 4 6 2 4 6 3 Chapter 4 Navigation or you can select All Time marks are displayed for all visible routes as long as only routes from the past month is displayed The information field Total displays the number of Past Tracks that appear for the selected time interval The Past Track Select function is used to select and edit colour change a previous track It can also be used to select a specific track for display even with a non specified age Activating the colour function is indicated by the cursor changes to an arrow with a small sheet icon to the edge Left click with this arrow positioned over a track will change its colour assuming that INT 1 chart presentation is activated Right click anywhere in the chart to exit this mode The Past Track Delete function is activated when the cursor changes to a cross same functional behaviour as the Delete function in the past track menu Left click with this cross positioned over a track to deleted it Note that only the tracks older than 90 days can be del
174. h SOG as a constant speed to the bearing point lt is displayed in a small window at the top right corner of the chart view The bearing can be locked to a fixed heading by entering a value between O and 360 degrees in the small window by the bearing line anchor point The font size of the cursor data bearing and Cursor 59 03 GESIN range numerical values can be changed by Pos 010 39 086 E clicking anywhere in the cursor info field When EBL 1 059 8 198 NM the font size of the cursor data is increased switching between EBL A and EBL R mode operation is not available The current bearing mode is indicated on the button that precedes the bearing numeric value EBL T indicates that a given true bearing is displayed in the chart respectively EBL R indicates that a relative bearing is shown Bearing mode is set back to true mode EBL T each time the anchor point is moved outside own vessel s position Peilings modus for eget fart y beholdes slik det var satt sist gang eget fart y var ankringspunkt By left click in the chart the anchor point of the bearing line is moved ina new location Estimated time commitment to go from the anchor point to bearing point with the current speed is displayed in a small window at the top right of the chart The EBL VRM origin point can be moved back to own vessel s position by mouse left click on the boat symbol By right click in the chart the target point is locked t
175. hat ANG halaan GB ee N ED 256 B 1 8Explanations of weather data chart symbols 256 B 1 9Selection of units for wind speed temperature etc 257 B 1 10Treatment of downloaded weather forecasts 258 B 1 11Alarm Settings EE cece cece cece cece eee 259 B 1 12Set the alarm settings 259 B 1 13About alarm conditions 00 2 200 22 eee e eee SG ee 260 B 1 14The timeline feature 0 0 0 cece cece Gee 261 B 2Radar overlay 264 B 2 1Radar overlay correction EES SESSE SEGE ee 264 B 2 2Radar display slider control 265 B 3Piracy Information _ 2 0 GE 266 B 3 1Activation of Pirate option 266 B 3 2Turn on display EE EE ccc ccccccccccceeeeeeceeeeeeees 266 B 3 3Adjust the viewing of piracy data 267 B 4Autopilot Track control 269 B 4 1Autopilot mode u occ e GEE Gee 269 B 4 2Sensor surveillance and error tolerance 270 B 4 3TECDIS TCS operation 2 1 B 4 4Activating Heading Control mode eee 272 B 4 5Activating Track Control mode aaaaaaaaaaaaaaa0aa220000 272 B 4 6External Remote mode SE SEE 273 B STECDIS keypad 2 274 B 5 1The lay t PAN 274 BO KEN aaa a ES a a eo Ge ee ee oe RE EE EE 275 B 5 3Alarm functionality LL 277 244 Appendix B Optional add ons B 5 4Navigating your TECDIS with the keypad EE 277 B 5 5Numeric mode GE GE EG 278 B 5 6Use
176. hat are loaded is displayed Telko Chart Loader v2 00 Finished Loading finished at 22 55 06 Return BERDREDEQE BENG PAKANA GG ABG ROER BEE EE EE KAKA AE AE AA AN AA AE AB AB KK AAE licence verifying compiling loaded successfully ZA5N0020 005 Decrypting SSE 20 licence verifying compiling loaded successfully ZA5N0020 006 Decrypting SSE 20 licence verifying compiling loaded successfully Finalizing import Import completed Cells successfully loaded from this exchange set 20649 Licensed cells not loaded from this exchange set 0 Cells skipped Equivalent or newer present in SENG 12539 When the clart loading is complete Import Complete is displayed in the progress window The window will also display loading details The chart loading process is finished by pressing the Return button 9 Press the Show README txt button to read the release notes for the chart 10 The loaded charts are now available in TECDIS in a separate chart database Note The chart loading log has to be inspected when chart loading is finished The log contains details of all error messages and warnings Read more in the next chapter 142 Chapter 6 Chart installation and maintenance 6 1 4 Create the User Permit file If you are using Navtor Navstick or the Neptune service by Nautisk Forlag you can use this procedure when creating User Permits for the rapid installation The same applies to chart loading in the S63 Cha
177. he data is verified automatically If errors occur am S57 Error Report appears Here it is shown which imported file the error applies to and if the error is critical or non critical Files with critical errors are not imported Files with non critical errors potential irregularities of data can be manually imported or rejected by clicking Continue or Skip 5 The import process can be cancelled by clicking the Stop button If the Disable error report option is selected before data import is star ted the entire import process goes automatically 557 import files with critical errors will be omitted while files with non critical errors are imported 180 Chapter 6 Chart installation and maintenance NB When using the Disable error report there is no possibility to see detailed information about the causes and error of ENC cells that cannot be imported 6 An import log will be created This log can also be viewed by select ing the appropriate dataset in the Chart Library by scrolling down to the S57 import log in the information field 7 If there are imported chart updates in S57 format these can be viewed in C MAP chart update under Updating log review updates Read more in 6 2 1 Updating charts Jeppesen SENC see page 154 8 6 2 1 Updating charts Jeppesen SENC see page 154 e 6 2 1 Updating charts Jeppesen SENC see page 154 e 6 2 1 Updating charts Jeppesen SENC see page 154 6 6 2 Delete
178. he Cell Permit supplier and ask for a new Cell Permit file Load the new Cell Permit when the file is received During S63 startup Stop Chart S63 Loader 303 Permit format is incorrect Contact your data supplier and obtain a new permit file SSE 13 Cell Permit is invalid checksum is incorrect Contact your data supplier and obtain a new permit file SSE 14 Incorrect system date check that the computer clock if accessible is set correctly or contact your system supplier SSE 21 Decryption failed no valid cell permit found Permits may be for another system or new permits may be required please contact your supplier to obtain a new licence SSE 19 Permits are not valid for this system Contact your data supplier to obtain the correct permits During loading The Cell Permit have errors or is incorrectly formatted During S63 startup The saved Cell Permit has become unreadable During loading The Cell Permit have errors or is incorrectly formatted The system date has been reset A S63 encrypted chart cell file is corrupted or incorrect and or an outdated Cell Permit is IN use Cell Permit for one or more S63 chart cells do not contain the correct decryption keys During loading Check that the file is actually a Cell Permit file If this is confirmed contact the Cell Permit supplier and ask for a new Cell Permit file During S63 startup Stop Char
179. he best route to identify potential dangers or issues along the voyage and to commit the day to day decisions to a plan with safety for the vessel and crew at its core During route planning those parts of a route that has the highest potential risks involved should be reviewed an extra time During those reviews restrictions for ensuring safe sailing should be outlined This should be done before sailing begins 63 Chapter 4 Navigation 4 1 2 Starting the route planning tool The route planning button is placed in the main toolbar It activates the route planning toolbar on the left side of the display When a route is selected or activated for sailing this toolbar will appear automatically when the cursor is hovered over the upper left corner of the display The route planning toolbar is automatically hidden by the system if it has not been in use within the last minute The toolbar has the following functions Make new routes e Draw a new route directly in the charts e Make a route with coordinates directly in the voyage planner e Activate the selected route e C routes automatic route generation e Search And Rescue SAR Organizing the routes e Primary and secondary routes e Route selector and route search with route export e Delete selected route e Voyage planner e Save and export the route list Modify existing routes e Extending a route e Modify waypoints directly in the charts e Merge routes e Copy
180. he chart view Chart symbols own objects It is easy to insert your own symbols in TECDIS You have the following types of chart symbols available e Lines e Areas e Point symbols Symbols can be used to mark a danger zone not present in any chart or chart update or to mark fishing grounds Lines and areas can be connected to the alarm system in TECDIS and it can be colour coded in 5 6 available colours At a glance you can set symbols where you want to mark what you want In the following subchapters we will explain how you place symbols in the chart how you change them and what attributes can be set for them MOB symbol eventmarker These two functions are the quickest to place They are available on the MOB icon in the main toolbar e A MOB symbol Man OverBoard is placed in the position of the ves sel by left clicking the icon or by pressing the F10 key on the key board TECDIS automatically starts a bearing to the MOB symbol The symbol is removed by pressing the F7 key on the keyboard or by removing it like you would remove other symbols e Anevent marker symbol is placed in the position of the vessel by right clicking the icon or by pressing the F11 F12 key on the key board This symbol marks an event and you can enter text for it in the chart inspector Opening the symbol menu By clicking on the Symbol button or the F7 key on the keyboard a window opens titled Mariner Objects From here you can edit se
181. he green tracking ring and vector The target ID or name if available is displayed in the chart view when you hover over it with the cursor Shown ID number is the ID number from the radar plus 1000 or 3000 for targets from Radar 1 or plus or 2000 or 4000 for targets from Radar 2 122 Chapter 5 Other functions By clicking on a radar tracked target a detailed ARPA target Id 1001 INA Ho ien window idle be BRG 0097 Pos AE 06777 N displayed together with CPA inform DIST 05 NM 065 23 GED W ation The tracked target past COC 0810 PA 120 NM positions can be saved click Save SOG 100kn TCPA 3 A min button or deleted click Delete v Aktivere BOQ N Lagre Slette button The target can be pps enabled disabled by check uncheck the Enable box The CPA marking is shown in the chart by checking the CPA box Click the OK button to close the window The behaviour of the ARPA radar targets is affected by the settingssee The AIS menu on page 210 the AIS menu tab see AIS menu 123 5 4 AIS operation With AIS in TECDIS you get access to displaying AIS targets in the chart view expanded vessel information and an AIS list of all vessels equipped with AIS within range Display of AIS targets is activated by left clicking the AIS button in the AIS main toolbar The AIS list will appear when you right click the AIS button When AIS targets are displayed you also have access to oth
182. he route legs not in use are discarded Example 3 two intersecting waypoints lt 0 1INm When both the first and last waypoint of a new route part intersects waypoints on the original route the original route part in between those intersections is replaced by the new route part Save the new merged route The merged routes will appear a a new route and TECDIS will automat ically reset the waypoint numbering You can now save the route as a new route by pressing the Copy active route to new route button 84 4 1 15 Copy selected route Br If you want to create a new route based on an existing one a copy of the original route can be created using the Copy active route to new route function First the existing route should be selected When pressing the Copy active route to new route button a dialogue box opens click OK button to confirm copying and saving of the original route The route that appears on the screen is a copy with an independent status and can be modified in the usual way and it will be saved as a new route 4 1 16 Great circle route Routes in TECDIS can be configured as great circle routes This is done in the voyage planner requires that you have entered it through starting route edit mode Rundtur 29wp 67NM 4Omin0753 T Endre WP Jwp ee lat On Standart 29 50 58880 N ON 20972 art joo a sp sesen ow 0977 In the column for GC Great circle in the voyage planner you c
183. her value is recommended for example between 180 240 seconds D Inthe HTTP Proxy Server field you set the settings as required by your local network to access the Internet Your local net work administrator can inform about the correct settings for HTTP Proxy Server E Click Save Config button to save the configuration and return to the download window Mac Attachment size tk 000 E mail updates A If TECDIS is not set up for an Internet connection or weather updates for other reasons will not happen directly weather updates can be obtained by generating a file then sending it as an attachment to an e mail on another computer 249 Ver ll Click Save Config button to save the configuration and return to the download window Select E mail in Communication Type field Set Max Attachment Size to a value less than the limit for e mail attachments that apply to local mail server Is the limit is 1 MB Mega Byte enter this as 1000 in Max Attachment Size field where the values are expressed in KB Kilo Byte Click Save Request File button to initiate saving of the order file Specify the location where the order file is to be saved and press the Select button It is a condition that the order file is stored on a removable medium such as a TECDIS Service Key The order file is generated and a window opens showing the progress Send this file to datacenterx c map no and wait until all responses are received
184. here are two options horizontal along the top of the monitor default and vertical along the left side of the monitor Allow Standby Mode In this mode no audible alarms will sound Activation of this mode is done in the Safe menu tab Allow standby mode will also allow deactiv ation of CPA alarms in TECDIS Alarm if HDT1 HDT2 gt 2 52 When this box is checked an alarm will be given if the heading from the two sensors Heading 1 and Heading 2 deviates with more than 2 5 degrees NOTE If TECDIS is configures with Track control this option will be available from that settings tab in TECDIS Setup Remote silence only Only available for systems connected to an alarm central If an alarm is acknow ledged on the alarm central with this function activated only the alarm sound will be turned off The alarm will still remain in TECDIS Keyboard alarm is the built in alarm sounder in the Furuno RCU 018 Keyboard With this selected TECDIS will ask the navigator which waypoint to connect a route leg to This route leg will start in the own vessel position This question will be asked when a route is selected for activation and voy age If two positioning methods are in use pressing this but ton will remove the past track line from the secondary position sensor Here you write the name of the vessel Here you write the MMSI number of the vessel 229 Here you can restore all settings in NMEA server Con ning
185. hich peripheral to use yourself Trackball mouse All functions and operations can be controlled by moving the pointer across the monitor with the trackball maouse and using the right and left mouse buttons to call to action Functions can be activated and deactivated and the chart can be panned and zoomed 1 The left mouse button is used to operate primary functionality for all tools functions and icons In addition you zoom inwards in the chart with this button centred on the point you have placed the pointer 2 The right mouse button is used to operate secondary functionality for all tools functions and icons in addition to zooming outwards in the chart 3 The centre mouse button alternatively the scroll wheel centres the chart at the point where the pointer is placed If you have a trackball with a scroll wheel as the middle button you can configure TECDIS to zoom by scrolling the wheel See 7 2 The Setup menu see page 186 Keyboard The keyboard that is supplied with TECDIS is pre configured with combin ation commands for the most important functions In addition a digital keyboard will appear on screen and this is operated by the mouse and pointer when keyboard input is needed The combination commands are as follows F1 Info on chart functions F2 Chart guery by cursor F3 Name search add on F4 Chart Legend F5 Settings menu F6 Route menu ia F7 Mariner symbol object menu F8 Mariner line area ob
186. icate is provided and matches trusted HO certificate 1 ss P dpive Fraid R o8 Drive FRAID e TszExamine TRAID T LOAD CHARTS Show README TXT Remove installed About QUIT Remove AIO notices AIO notices can also be removed This is done in the S63 Chart Loader To delete installed AIO notices a source containing new notices has to be recognized by the system When recognized the Remove Installed button will become available as shown in the image below You also have to confirm that you want to remove the AIO notices 159 Telko Chart Loader v2 6 0 Load Charts rence S 63 Source a Publication Date ed d Number of cells UKHO Admiralty Information Overlay CAIO Issue WK15 14 Cor 104 2014 D VOIXO1 1 with valid cell permits 1 updates Can Confidence of authenticity i pi L gh 9 Esih trusted certificate 7 EE co previously installed AIO data will be erased from the harddisk Proceed er 41 trusted IHO certificate 1 ai Remove Installed WITT NAD CHAR Ed sa TE y an 6 3 2 3 AIO types and display The AIO service contains four different object types Temporary objects Placed in the chart to mark a temporary change in conditions affecting navigation Preliminary objects Placed in the chart to mark important changes affecting navigation that are either planned for the future
187. ication areas Contact your TECDIS supplier for details 226 Appendix A TECDIS Setup A 4 Vessel settings Specification Note Descriptions in this chapter are presented as information only Only authorized service technicians can reconfigure the settings mentioned in this chapter The exception from this is Allow route activation entry lane that can be set by the navigator TEGDIS TELchart ECS Setup local Ip 1192_168_0_233 x Nmea Data Specification chart Installation Misc Licensing Track Control ver 1 7 22 one Ma Other TECDIS station s data export Ship size m Position sensor 1 Name Tecos 2 Ip H92 1881102 n3 4 Length 82 m from bow i p 3 a Name TELchart El IP 192 168 1 103 Mid N23 E Beam ha E m center gt starbrd z M This unit is TECDIS3 or above 50 4 Draught min M Radar use true EBL reference 80 Draught max Position sensor 2 M Arpa is conning referenced b F Safe dpt min lao F m from bow Monitor size main menu h2 Height 2 m center gt starbrd 24 sidebar 848 7 backward gyro 180 Conning position wa m i Ha Radar antenna 1 M Video toggle VGA bd PAG a 105 E m from how T Alternative display comm 0 m center gt starbrd is zi 25 g m center gt starbrd Alarm m height Allow Standby Mode Depth transducer Radar anten
188. ield below For some attributes you can select values from a dropdown list and some feature a locked selection 3 When the desired changes have been made press the Save button 4 Register the name initials of the navigator that has performed the change Chart corrections can also be selected for changing deleting by selection with the query cursor 6 3 3 4 Delete chart corrections G Professional lag y Endre attributt Endre geometri Slette objekt 71441740 Buoy shape 0 Buoy special purpose Category of special purpose mark lt unknown gt Added 28 09 2011 10 20 30 Updated by Ove Br then Conspicuous radar 0 Update Information Buoy special purpose general Source of update Temporary from 01 06 2011 until 01 08 2011 NO 1 Object name Garnholmen Measuring buoy 68 m Marker Herma sd Author of update Ove Brathen The remove button deletes the entire update history for the selected object s in a selected chart sheet The Remove button is found at the bottom left side of the manual chart corrections window This functionality is only available while in Servicemode 167 6 3 4 Update log To see all updates made to your charts you can review them in the update log The update log also logs chart corrections 1 In the TECDIS program open the Setup menu and select C Map chart update in the Chart Utilities dropdown list 2 A new window appears Here you s
189. ill only be a graphical enlargement and there is no more refinement in displayed chart inform ation This is called overscale Any flaws that might be in the charts will be enlarged together with the chart display The field that indicates your currently selected scale will be displayed in orange when the chart display is in overscale mode Overscale will in addition be displayed with vertical lines on the chart When parts of the displayed chart is in overscale only these parts are marked with vertical lines When you zoom out from your current chart display you may enter a state of underscale The chart information display can then be to dense and chart information may not be displayed The field that indicates your currently selected scale will be displayed in green when the chart display is in underscale mode 48 Chapter 3 The chart view 3 4 Chart symbols IHO Presentation library The IHO Presentation library provides an overview of all ECDIS symbols and test images The library is opened by pressing Control Alt Shift T By pressing the keys O to 9 on your keyboard you cycle between the pages of symbols in the presentation library To view a description of the different symbols utilize the chart inspector query cursor Es Dag 7 Nord STD USER ca E0000 e s woo ao 5H 8 mo A KA am N iy DA ie Fa EBL The main toolbar is hidden when the presentation library is opened
190. imension displayed in the Circle frame and so the plotting begins with yellow plot past pos itions in Safe radius circle Warn option has the same functionality as the View option but is marking with a yellow Anchorguard circle in the chart display and will also trigger an yellow visual warning Alarm option has the same functionality as the Warn option but a red Anchorguard circle will appear in the chart in addition to a visual red signal as well as auditive alarm noti fication s121 5 3 ARPA and radar targets cy You can connect up to two radars to TECDIS and display ARPA radar targets for both Display of radar echo and radar cursor is also available To activate ARPA radar targets in the chart view simply press one of the 5 two ARPA radar target buttons on the main toolbar These buttons are only available if ARPA radar targets are received from the radars The help text displayed when you hover over these buttons is the name set for that radar in TECDIS Setup and allows for easy differ entiation 1 By left clicking the buttons ARPA and radar targets will be shown in the chart view 2 By right clicking the buttons you activate radar echo and radar cursor Activation of this will alter the button to be displayed as shown in the illustration to the left All tracked radar targets are shown as green rings with course vectors Deactivated sleeping radar targets are shown without t
191. is warning is enabled in TECDIS 1 5 minutes before the course change WOP as configured in TECDIS Setup If Change Course early warning 1 was confirmed by the oper ator this warning is enabled in TECDIS 30 60 seconds before the course change WOP as con figured in TECDIS Setup If Change Course early warning 1 was not confirmed by the operator this alarm is activated in TECDIS 30 60 seconds before the course change WOP as configured in TECDIS Setup If Change Course LAST warning 2a was not confirmed by the operator this alarm is activated in the TECDIS at the weelover point WOP 4 The Turn course changing is performed Back up Nav igator Alarm 5 from the sep arate alarm sys tem If Change Course LAST warning 2a or New WP 3 was not con firmed by the operator a back up Navigator Alarm will be activated on the separate alarm system When 1 5 min before WOL 30 60 sek before WOL 30 60 sek before WOL At WOL At WOL 30 sec after WOL As long as the Track Control is active the system will at all times continue to keep the vessel on the planned course over ground COG regardless of the alarms and warnings that have been acknowledge by operator SZ he B 4 4 Activating Heading Control mode B 4 5 The Heading button will set the autopilot in AP mode Heading ctrl Heading Control Mode Track Headin Activating Track Control mode The Track
192. ject menu F9 Timestamp past track F10 Man over board MOB F11 Own ship position fix F12 Event mark Screen day night colours Display orientation STD 552 AUTO presentation USER presentation Conning display Veerdisplay opsjon Radaroverlay opsjon EBL VRM functions ARPA AIS O O On OU A W N FE W A B C D E F G Kartnivaer S simulated position and DR Arrow keys Move chart Page Up Zoom out at selected level Page Down Zoom in at selected level Zoom out auto level Ins Move cursor chart to a position Del S52 chart presentation auto positioning Enter Left mouse key at cursor position or lt Darker screen colours or gt Brighter screen colours Esc space Alarm off list sequential Ctrl PrtScr Save present screenshot Ctrl Alt Shift T Monitor calibration test 39 Chapter 2 The basics 2 1 3 Other peripherals TECDIS can be equipped with alternative keyboards and trackballs Contact your local Furuno Norway dealer or Furuno Norway for more information and purchase In addition you can expand the functionality by using custom keyboard s keypads TECDIS has two available custom keyboards e The Furuno RCU 018 keyboard with the same layout as Furunos radar keyboards e TECDIS Keypad a 21 digit fast access keypad custom made for TECDIS that can be mounted in the TECDIS console or on the arm rest for easy access to the most important features Mo
193. kbox now With it selected the correction will only be displayed for the active chart Nytt objekt fra Notice to Mariners Fortsett Angre Database PNG Notat Temporary from 01 06 2011 until 01 08 20 O M Opprinnelig produsent Norwegian Hydrographic Service EE Source Identification code INO143000000 Ek Marker nenne Vis In the window that appears you have to fill inn e Chart database e Provider e Name of the chart sheet source identification code e Source information in the Notes field When you have selected the object type in the list you can press Continue 165 10 11 12 Endre geometri Continue Angre a 71441740 Extrase ae Distructon Marker Henne Now a new field opens for entering positions Here both longitude and latitude can be entered by typing or by visual insertion Press the Continue button e ENC Endre attributt Lagre Angre Water level effect Value of sounding Nature of surface Information Object name Seale mayimum Marker Fjerne Verdi Felt for informasjon om kartobjekt Now a last field is opened Here you set values for e depth e text information e min max scale Finishnby pressing the Save button Modified By Pa K Hansen Cancel Register the name initials of the navigator that has performed the correction 6 3 3 3 Change the correction 1 Open the chart corrections window
194. king the red or green arrow under the wheel e or by using the mouse scroll wheel Set RoT can be adjusted by sliding the controller just below the display for Set RoT with the left mouse button pressed 273 B 5 TECDIS keypad B 5 1 This chapter explains the design setup and usage of TECDIS Keypad It features system controlled indicator lights and auto dimmable backlit keys The unit is protected at IP22 level and has an expected lifetime of 200 000 operations per key The layout LIGHT SENSOR IP22 MEMBRANE SURFACE DIMMABLE LED LIGHT BUTTON BORDER BLACK PAINTED SURFACE METAL BEZEL SECONDARY KEY FUNCTION PRIMARY KEY FUNCTION 274 B 5 2 Keys i DIE gt Cd GE DIT N VER Appendix B Optional add ons Set the chart presentation to 52 presentation Move chart view to own vessel position In numeric mode it is the number 8 Chart panning up In menus it has scroll functionality In numeric mode it is the number 5 Chart panning down In menus it has scroll functionality In numeric mode it is the number O Chart panning left In numeric mode it is the number 7 Chart panning right In numeric mode it is the number 9 Chart panning up left In numeric mode it is the number 4 Chart panning up right In numeric mode it is the number 6 Chart panning down left When an alarm sounds it switches to alarm acknowledge function
195. l sailing across one or more time zones the time zone adjustment is used to adjust the clock shown on TECDIS with ten minute intervals relative to UTC 7 2 4 NMEA input status NMEA Input Status button opens a list of e which ports the various sensor data are retrieved from e what kind of NMEA sentences are used e input description if entered in TECDIS Setup 187 7 2 5 7 2 6 Chapter 7 System settings Naea data inputs own IP 192 168 0 233 The Status column indicates whether the ag ars Par Position 1 IP 2 GGA GPSI test data data IS received or not Position 2 GGA GPS2 no data ii d COG SOG 1 IP 2 VIG GPS data This is only a info summary any changes must ve ps awe Heading 1 IP 2 HOT G dat to these settings are made in TECDIS EF or he Speed Log IP 2 VHW Log data SetuTE C D ISp Rd Arpa 1 IP 2 TIM Radar 1 no data Baa Rd Arpa 2 P2 TIM Radar 2 no data Primary positioning method Rd curs 1 P2 RSD Radar1 no data Rd curs 2 IP 2 RSD Radar 2 no data In the NMEA Data Input window both MS P1 ANON data 5 Depth IP 2 DPT Sounder no data sources for positioning appears and can Rewind P2 MWV Wind no data R Route P2 RTE RTE no data be selected which one shall be primary EE POSItIOn jas primary position OK and whether the secondary position is Display both primary and secondary position shown or not on chart display In case of failure of the primary sour
196. l still be shown in the list as long as they are active Some notifications contain detailed information that is visible when you click the notification list For added detail information Anti grounding alert and Possible danger alert show its own list of dangerous objects When you click on each of the dangerous objects in the list its graphic representation is highlighted on the chart When it is confirmed the alarm Ship CPA will display the AIS ARPA target window with details 101 Alarm text DANGER Ship CPA Lost CPA Point Info OFF TRACK New WP Last WP Low Speed Lost Sensor Position 1 Lost Sensor Position 2 Lost Sensor Heading 1 Lost Sensor Heading 2 Lost Sensor Water Speed Sensor Error Pos 1 Wrong Datum Sensor Error Pos 2 Wrong Datum Gyros Chapter 4 Navigation 4 5 3 Alarm texts Description Anti grounding Click to open list Collision danger By clicking on the Ship CPA 7 in alarm list the AIS ARPA target window for the relevant vessel Lost signal for a target that has an active CPA alarm opens Lost AIS Lost signals from an AIS targets within range specified in AIS menu folder The vessel has reached a WP with a notice before waypoint Critical WP For this route voyage the vessel has moved outside the route corridor New waypoint if this alarm is activated Track Control Alarm for changing course triggered when the warnings
197. lder a list with chart databases that are installed on the computer is displayed 857 OPACO ENG 441 Professional 620 Mark with a tick in the box next to the databases which to use e ENC official ENC in C MAP SENC format e World non official C MAP charts CD e Professional non official C MAP chart DVD e S57 official charts in S57 format e S63 official charts in S63 format NB This field does not appear if you only have one chart database installed 7 2 8 Alarm volume Alarm volume is adjustable by sliding controller in the range between 65 to 90 dBA only displayed when alarm sound is set to PC speaker or keyboard in TECDIS setup It is not possible to reduce alarm volume completely which would also be against the certification of the equipment and IMO require ments 190 7 2 9 7 2 9 1 Auxilary The dropdown menu Auxilary contains the following functions Recalibrate l Resets the monitor display to correctly calibrated values screen Conning sa Control commands to any connected Conning display Backwards conning is used for a TECDIS unit that is mode and _ positioned facing the stern of the vessel and displays the Backwards l l vessel up side down on the conning monitor conning Export DB This add on functionality is only used in agreement with Status Telko or Furuno Norway F1 and F2 See next section for more information key settings Sc
198. lect and add different objects symbols lines and areas that will be displayed on the chart It is also possible to filter previously entered objects on a time line and by color EA 3 6 2 1 Selecting and displaying objects symbol line and area Mariner objects are displayed in the chart by clicking on the Show Selection dame AEREE button and removed from the TE screen with Hide button When Mariner objects are visible the icon button from Main Toolbar is activated GAL T Showtime Select sen Edit Symbol Show The upper frame of the dialog box provides control over which Mariner objects to be displayed e Check All to display all Mariner objects tick the box when add or modify symbols line area e Uncheck All to display objects filtered by o Colour o Symbol type o Ifthe Show time box is checked display is limited to symbols m that where made after the From data but before the To date m that where made after the After date Note that only the first two date conditions From and To or only the third condition After must be satisfied for an object to be displayed For example if the operator wants to display only symbols createdin a certain previous time period without viewing recent created symbols the time period can be introduced in From and To date fields whiles After is set to a future date In addition boat hook button is used to select a single line or area o
199. lect the Chart menu Text generic ext oth Safe hazards Make sure text other and INT1 is activated Press the Layers button A new window appears In the dropdown list select f if log Safe Ais 5 the chart database you want Setup Chart ship Data Layers to switch on T amp P for Text generic L Safe hazards Shallow soundings SO Deep soundings All depth contours Danger symbol Cables and pipes Bottom type Grid lines Lights character rie Buan info i C Active lights Improved back ground and overview charts Faille ear Ee Terrain data gridded OSmallcraftinfo gt emporary and Preliminary Notices F Bescicecg Piracy Information 2 852 mi kio GOOD pan wo Professional 627 C MAP Tides tidal heights and streams GMDSS areas SAR regions Check the box next to Tem porary and preliminary notices to activate T amp P To a deactivate uncheck the box EEEE Y Q C 4 3 Admiralty Information Overlay AIO AIO is an optional service in TECDIS To acquire AIO contact your AVCS dealer 291 C 4 4 AIO requires AVCS charts and TECDIS AIO Update has to be installed AlO display T amp P notices in a separate datalayer in TECDIS This datalayer can be switched on and off whenever wanted by the navigator This is done in the following way Press the Menu button
200. less than 3 days TECDIS will issue a warning about this Lists of chart dynamic license both reported and unreported opens the C Map Chart Manager started from Chart Installation Misc folder in TECDIS Setup Adjustment for automatic ENC licensing Adjustment for automatic ENC Licensing is performed in License list With TECDIS Service Key connected by opening this window is it possible to adjust the threshold value Dynamic Licensing Range NM see illus tration above 177 6 5 4 7 Route Planning using ENC diagrams Since only chart within a given distance is licensed automatically in the default mode it is possible to plan a voyage in advance without being charged for extra chart license costs When it is determined that the voyage will take place the route should be checked against the charts to meet the government requirements for paperless navigation TECDIS Service Key is required to license a chart outside the parameters which are set in the Dynamic Licensing Range NM When TECDIS Service Key is pluged in a USB port a Payment button will be available in the Chart folder in the Menu folder By clicking this button activates the payment mode In the payment mode all requested E chart cells are licensed including E a log Safe Ais outside Dynamic Licensing Range BN 74 Setup Chart ship Data NM na layers Payment baes a Text oenerie
201. logy that makes it easy for others to pick up the route later Enter a new stop for the voyage This is done in the field New Stop You can select between three ways to specify the stop Own ship pos on P POS Often used to set the first waypoint for the voyage If this is selected and you press the Set button you can Specified pos EREE then left click with the cursor in the position in the chart ition where you want to place the waypoint Used to select ports that are found in the C Routes port list The list is divided in to nationalities and you ther erfore have to first select the corresponding country for Select from oordie the port you want to add i the first dropdown list and then select the port in the second lower dropdown list In the dropdown list it is also possible to enter the first letter for the country port When the port position is specified use the Play button to transfer the entry to the port of call list Port of call list Next to the New Stop field there is a Port of call list As you add ports for your voyage this list will fill up When you have added all ports of call you desire you can edit their order with the arrow buttons next to the list You can delete a port of call by pressing the X button nexct to the list 70 You can also get more information about the port of call you have selected in the list by pressing the Info button Information that is displayed includes among o
202. m ECMWF 27 06 2012 01 00 00 30 06 2012 01 00 00 Valid until 30 juni 2012 Subscription limited to 6400 sq degrees Y Trykk p Vind B Alarmer 4 sykloner b Bolger 1 Temp se Skyen Temperature Temperature at sea level Wind Wind strength and direction Area North 75 00 00N South 66 00 008 ce n S S Tipasse Markor info Ale 9 Data Enh Tidslinje Alarmer Subscription Details Forecast period up to 10 days with 12 hours resolution Available Parameters Pressure Pressure at sea level When subscription download is complete the subscription s are inspected by doing the following 1 Press the Download New button in the Data field 2 Show Subscription button should now be selectable and by pressing it you can view details about the weather models that are available in your subscription 3 Subscriptions applicable to the eToken in use now appears in the right hand side of the window With the slider to the right of the field you can navigate down on the list if it is long Downloading a new weather forecast When the subscription is loaded the weather forecasts are available The weather forecasts are related to weather models B 1 4 1 About weather models Both the Model field in the Download New window and subscription information window Show Subscription window show a number of weather models after the weather subscription is downloaded These refer to the various mathema
203. m then it can be used to control the chart system The trackball can be used to move the cursor and general system navigation aooodod OFF on EBL F1 F2 ALARM STD ACK DSP SYSTEM NB Double clicking and drag and drop is not supported The scroll wheel can be used to modify fields with up down control for example the fields for speed corridor radius and stop time in the route planner It can also be used to zoom in and out in the charts Information on enabling scroll zoom can be found in the settings chapter RCU 018 has the following keys Key Description Func Turns the chart system on off This button will not Gran Power affect the monitor which has to be shut of separately VRM rotary Adjust the active VRM A encoder Activates and displays VRM1 if not sh if VRM2 i VRM ON ng S own Or IS A active Activates and displays VRM2 if VRM1 is active Deactivates and removes VRM OFF A VRM if both VRM s are 281 EBL rotary encoder EBL ON EBL OFF F1 F2 ALARM ACK SYSTEM FAILURE RADAR STD DSP 1 MARK 2 ABC P BRILL 3 DEF MODE 4 GHI OFF CNT displayed Deactivates and removes VRM2 if VRM1 is active a Adjust the active EBL Activates and displays EBL1 if not shown or if EBL2 is active Activates and displays EBL2 if EBL1 is active Deactivates and removes EBL1 if both EBL s are displayed Deactivates and Fi
204. mail with an attachment called password usr This attachment must be stored on the TECDIS Service Key usb dongle so that it can be added to the system in TECDIS Setup Activation of Pirate option Activation is done as follows 1 Follow the procedure for entering license for Jeppesen as described in 6 5 2 Chart licenses Jeppesen SENC see page 172 Use Pro fessional or Primar as database when the procedure requires it Select Add License From File 2 Perform a chart update of at least either the Jeppesen Professional or the JeppesenPrimar database Turn on display C MAP Tides tidal heights and streams GMDSS areas SAR regions Improved background and overview charts gt 852 ma 08 Terrain data gridded 2 see pos Piracy Information Now all available piracy data is available in TECDIS and ready for use Viewing pirate data in the chart is started by 1 Open the TECDIS menus 2 Select te Chart tab 266 B 3 3 Adjust the viewing of piracy data Latest 12 weeks 4 gt Piracy Information KI Appendix B Optional add ons Click the Layers button Tick for Piracy information in Supplementary Data folder for the desired chart database Make the appropriate selections in the Piracy Information window for proper display of current pirate data as described in the next section A sa am an am he Praoynate C Apri20 gt Select None
205. me Status Number and Date are all shown for each update e The Status column will either contain Accepted or Rejec ted e De oppdateringene som er Rejected har blitt avvist eller fjernet If the Remark button is active an update note will be displayed by pressing it C The Review field contains a tree structure of all the chart updates sorted under the update publisher chart sheet and book number where the correction was published e Under each book number you will find information in cue form about all changes objects e Point objects are marked with a red circle in the charts lines are draw in red and areas are cross hatched in red e By double clicking on an object in the list the chart view will move to that object and it will be marked in red e Under each book number you will find information in cue form about all changed objects 168 Chapter 6 Chart installation and maintenance e Point objects are marked with a red circle in the charts lines are draw in red and areas are cross hatched in red D When a new CD from C Map is isntalled all previous updates will be removed E Manual rejection of updates e Left click the desired update in the list and then right click it Select Reject Update 4 Close the update log window for the changes to take effect 169 6 4 Delete chart databases Chart databases are deleted removed in the C Map Chart Manager program This program is accessed by opening TECDI
206. mp P _ ieee eee eee EE EE 290 C 4 3Admiralty Information Overlay AlO 2 eee eee eee 291 C 4 4Manual chart corrections 2 2 222 c cece eee e ee 292 C 5How do l activate Tides SE SS GE SG GE ee 293 C 6How to transfer system configuration 295 286 Appendix C Frequently asked questions C 1 Why isnt my route activated The most common cause that a route is not activated is that the TECDIS has been updated to a version that does not have the same options for route activation as the version you updated from You can activate you selected route in several ways both automatically and manually The activation method you choose should be affected by whether or not you can change the waypoint list or not This table provides an overview For this to be possible the auto route activation has to be selected in the Safe menu tab Automatic activation when inside the route corridor Manual activation when inside Is done by pressing the activate route but the route corridor ton on the route planner toolbar Automatic activation with For this to be possible the auto route placing of additional waypoint activation has to be selected in the Safe creating a route leg from the menu tab and Allow route activation vessel position to the first entry lane has to be selected in TECDIS waypoint Setup For this to be possible Allow roTECDISute activation entry lane has to be selected in Setup Man
207. n If the system finds a public license key file in the same folder as the CRT file you just selected this is installed automatically If not you will receive a message about this and you have to find the file manually If so repeat steps 6 and 7 but select file type txt Telko Chart Loader x The certificate PRIMAR has been loaded successfully Press Trust Selected to mark the certificate as trusted to complete the certificate installation When both files are loaded and the system recognizes the cer tificate and public license key as valid a confirmation is shown Press the OK button 174 Chapter 6 Chart installation and maintenance Telko Chart Loader v2 00 i Load Charts Licenses View Logs Certificates Installed Certificates Certificate Contents MATCHES Public Key Text File ff BIG p ff BIG p FCA6 82CE 8E12 CABA Z6EF CCF 110E 526D B078 BOSE DECB CDIE FCA6 82CE 8E12 CABA Z6EF CCF 110E 526D B078 BOSE B442 08F3 AE16 17AE O1F3 5B91 A47E 6DF6 3413 CSE1 ZEDO 899B DECB CD1E B4az 08F3 AE16 17AE O1F3 SB91 A47E 6DF6 CD13 ZACD 50D9 9151 BDC4 SEE 3759 ZE17 3413 CSE l ZEDO 899B CD13 ZACD SOD9 9151 BDC4 3EE 7 f f BIG q 3759 2E17 962E DDCC 369C BASE BBZ6 OEES B6Al Z6D9 346E 38CS BIG ff BIG g 962E DDCC 369C BASE BBZ6 OEE6 B6Al Z6D9 346E 38CS 6784 71B2 7ASC F44E ES1A 49C5 147D BlA9 AAFZ 44F0 5443 4D64 f f BIG g 8693 1DZD 1427 1B9E 3503 OB71 FD73 DA17 9069 BIZE 2935 630E 6784 71B2 7A9C F44E ES1A 49C5 147
208. n Clicking on this button the situation is displayed on the chart and Replay window opens automatically Replay of the situation can also be started from the Replay window as described in Visual Replay see page 204 Click on Query ais database button again to close the AIS database window and return to the present situation Delete Old Log Data Delete old data button deletes log data older than a year if the deletion is confirmed in the subsequent Delete log files older than one year window Screenshots Display screenshots from TECDIS can be generated at any time by pressing Ctrl Alt and PrtScrn buttons simultaneously or AltGr and PrintScrn A copy of the screen is automatically saved with a file name that is generated from the year month date time second YYMMDDHHMMSS and is available in C Program Files TECDIS Screens file 205 7 7 The Safe menu From version 4 1 7 15 of TECDIS it is no longer possible to set an 7 7 1 Chapter 7 System settings alarm sound for Restricted Caution and or Potential danger In the Safe menu you set the safety settings in TECDIS Among others it is here you adjust the different depth contours that are always shown in the charts and select settings for hazard display and anti grounding Safe Deep and Shallow In the chart view you will always see four depth areas with depth contours Safe Safe dpt Shallow Shallow
209. n hetskopiering og daglig bruk All Old format Ijeplayed selection l Limited area Function In this field select the function that is used to Bag copy own data to or from the file on hard disk IL Symbols CD memory stick _ Lines Areas You have the following options Execute e Copy out to file e Copy in from file e Copy to TECDIS 2 e Copy to TECDIS 3 e Delete The data backup is done by copying data to hard drive CD or memory stick for safe keeping It may also be necessary to copy data from one machine to another both for backup This alternative is available if configured in TECDIS Setup The name label is the same as the entered name label in TECDIS Setup NOTE To copy to other TECDIS units the IP address and name for the units must be configured in TECDIS Setup TECDIS 7 5 2 Restrict selection time area In this field you can specify what data to be copied in to out of TECDIS The field is dynamic and changes according to selected function in the field above 199 7 5 3 7 5 4 7 5 5 7 5 6 Chapter 7 System settings The All option includes all relevant data For some functions you can also restrict the data selection with a from date The Limited area option includes all data within a rectangle You will be prompted to draw the rectangle in the chart view after this option is selected If data from TECDIS vers 4 7 1 10 or earlier has been stored or copied
210. n TECDIS Setup see Appendix A If the sensor surveillance detects an error or any other error in the TCS is detected the TECDIS TCS will try to switch to heading control mode with the parameter setting that in the best possible way keeps the vessel on the planned COG Values for Set Course and Set Rate Of Turn are sat to the values they were at the time TECDIS TCS was interrupted NB If both course sensors report errors or if the autopilot loses power the rudder angle will not be affected It will keep the same angle as it had at the time the error occurred The following events and alerts are displayed when TECDIS TCS is stopped by the autopilot Autopilot TECDIS The Track Con trol Mode indic An alarm is started indicating Track Control Mode ation light turns is off off The Heading The information field for Track Control changes to Heading ctrl or Offline if the autopilot com munication is lost for more than 20 seconds Control Mode indication light is turned on The Track Con trol Stopped The Alarm Autopilot is started and the information Alarm is field displays Offline triggered 2 0 B 4 3 Appendix B Optional add ons TECDIS TCS operation When TECDIS TCS is in Track Control mode it will work together with the autopilot to keep the vessel sailing on the planned route relating to COG Before each WP the following sequence is performed Warning kad Har Description Th
211. n in the route planning toolbar An active route can also be edited without exiting vouage mode but the three waypoints closest ahead of the vessel are locked for editing 83 4 1 14 vd 4 1 14 1 Chapter 4 Navigation Merge routes Two or more routes can be combined to one new route To do this first select one of the routes to be combined When the first route has been selected you can start the route merging Left click the merge button and select the route to merge the first route with If you instead want to draw a new route to later on connect to a previously drawn route simply draw that route and as all routes are displayed in grey when drawing routes you will be able to see the route to merge it with during route drawing You can view the route you want to merge it with in the background as all previously created routes are displayed in grey in the background when a new route is created or edited Waypoints in selected route and the one you are adding are controlled against each other so that the routes are joined in intersecting or coinciding waypoints as shown below This gives flexible opportunities for merging routes Example 1 expanding a route The last waypoint coincides with the first on the other route or a connection is made between them Example 2 one intersecting waypoint lt 0 1Nm When one intersecting waypoint is present the result is a combination of the two routes T
212. na 2 E Ka iso 4 m from bow las E m from bow Erase Secondary past track Name SS DEMINI MMSI 259985000 EE GEE EG In this tab the dimensions of the vessel and sensor placement is specified In the table below some selected settings are listed and what effect those settings have on the TECDIS system 227 Field name im Description age Length beam draught and height of the vessel measured in meters Ples For Length and Beam fields the ship s largest Ship size m dimension value for length and beam should be used me 2 Length bs 2 Beam bo Draught min Bo Draught max D m Safe dpt min R F Height For Draught and Height the largest possible height and draught taking load conditions into consid eration should be entered For safe depth min enter the wanted minimum safe depth for the vessel This value overrides the draught min max as basis of the safe depth settings in the TECDIS Ship menu tab Navigators cannot set a shallower safe depth than this inside TECDIS If your TECDIS installation consists of two or more units the name and IP address for the connected units Other TECDIS are entered in this field unit s data The name you choose is used to identify the unit in the export Data menu tab in TECDIS If text is entered in this field EE EE when no unit is connected an alarm will be turned on Name TECDIS 2 IP 192 168 1 102 when TECDIS iS sta rted Name
213. nd press the left mouse button Dead reckoning will now be initiated and the vessel symbol is moved to the selected position The Auto DR button is only available when two or more observations are made and selected for display When this button is pressed the system will use the top two registration lines to automatically calculate and place an estimated position symbol As for the Mark EP button a window is displayed so that the operator can enter text that is visible on the chart and complementing information that is displayed when viewed with the object inspector Dead reckoning is immediately initiated with the calcu lated position as a starting point The DR off button can be used to disable dead reckoning mode and lets you return to use the position sensor data to position the vessel But this presupposes that dead reckoning was initiated from the LOP tab using either the Select EP for DR or the Auto DR buttons Note that this button will be unavailable if both position sensors are lost The Reset button removes all observations from the LOP tab and selected observations from the chart Note that when dead reckoning has been initiated using the LOP tab all input from the primary and secondary position sensors are ignored until dead reckoning is deactivated in the same tab Details on using the LOP tab to generate estimated positions and position observations are logged To access these logs use the DR fix button in the Log men
214. ndow you can configure the ET di EYE DR ed radar overlay You can set heading Heading 16 Radar HH and range separately for each radar 264 B 2 2 Appendix B Optional add ons You can also select which of the connected radars is to be presented as radar 1 To do this select the button 1 in the middle of the window and in the radar selection box to the right of the window you select the desired radar Radar display slider control The display of the radar overlay is controlled by the slider in the lower left corner of the screen Here you can use the top controller to set the overlay colour In S52 Chart Display Mode the color choices are light or dark green while the INT1 Chart Display Mode is an extension module with multiple colors ranging from green weak echo to yellow medium strong echo to red strong echo The lower slider controls the level of radar echoes transparency on a scale from 10 relatively opadue to 4 relatively trans parent 265 B 3 Piracy Information B 3 1 B 3 2 Valid only for TECDIS version 4 7 2 15 or later TECDIS have the ability to download data about piracy activities directly to your chart for planning and navigation Pirate Data is an additional service to the Jeppesen Professional or Primar map When the subscription is established pirate data will be included in chart updates You establish your subscription by contacting Jeppesen You will then receive an e
215. next deeper contour is displayed Some chart areas can contain incomplete data and even though non closed contours can be displayed on the charts they can not be used as safety contours 7 7 2 Check time and angle anti grounding parameters The specified values set a safety zone ahead of the vessel where dangerous objects will generate an alarm See chapter 4 4 Anti grounding see page 98 for details 207 Chapter 7 System settings 7 7 3 Auto Safe Hazard papa setting 7 7 4 The Auto safe hazard display settings determine how TECDIS displays danger objects within the safety contour during anti grounding alarm situations When an anti grounding alarm situation occurs this setting will determine if Safe hazard display and shallow soundings 7 3 The Chart menu see page 193 is to be activated or not The available settings are The selections for Safe hazards and Shallow Soundings A a in the chart menu determine the hazard display The display of Safe hazards and Shallow Soundings are On recom activated when an anti grounding alarm occurs and mended requires manual deactivation when the dangerous situation is passed The display of Safe hazards and Shallow Soundings are On and Off activated when an anti grounding alarm occurs and are automatically set back to their previous setting when the dangerous situation is passed Camera control formerly FLIR When Camera Control is activated in the Safe
216. nger mark in the security zone Alarm for expired licenses is triggered if more than half of the licenses have expired for less than 30 days ago Check the license status and contact chart provider Only for dynamic licensing If it s been a long time since last update perform an online chart update and restart TECDIS Only for dynamic licensing If the credit limit is exceeded contact Jeppesen Marine to update your subscription Perform an online chart update and then restart TECDIS Other alarm conditions check the alarm list Appears when there are two or more active alarms and all alarms and warnings have been confirmed 103 Chapter 4 Navigation 4 5 4 Warning text Warning text new CAUTION Lost Sensor COG SOG 1 Lost Sensor COG SOG 2 Lost Sensor Heading 1 Lost Sensor Heading 2 Lost Sensor Water Speed Lost Sensor Radar Arpa 1 Lost Sensor Radar Arpa 2 Lost Sensor Radar Cursor 1 Lost Sensor Radar Cursor 2 Lost Sensor AIS Lost Sensor Depth Lost Sensor Relative Wind Lost Sensor Route Possible Danger Lost backup link to other TECDIS Change Course Description The vessel is entering a new area where special condi tions applies Clicking on new Caution in the alarm list the danger object is highlighted with red in the chart TECDIS is no longer receiving data from sensor for COG SOG1 TECDIS is no longer receiving
217. now available in TECDIS in a separate chart database Note The chart loading log has to be inspected when chart loading is finished The log contains details of all error messages and warnings Read more in the next chapter 140 Chapter 6 Chart installation and maintenance 6 1 3 Ouick installation with Neptune from Nautisk Forlag If you use charts from Nautisk Forlag with the Neptune service TECDIS offers a rapid chart installation from the S63 Chart Loader program Before you begin acquire Cell Permits Installation of chart with S63 Chart Loader requires Cell Permits for licensing Cell Permits are received from your chart provider For your chart provider to give you correct cell Permits you have to prepare and send your unique User Permit to your provider The procedure for preparing and sending User Permits can be found in the cha6 1 4 Create the User Permit file see page 143 crate user permit The procedure for installation is as follows 1 Insert a TECDIS Service Key in an available usb port in the TECDIS unit 2 Wait until the Service mode label appears in the bottom right corner of the chart view and then you exit the TECDIS program 3 Insert the usb dongle with the files received from Nautisk Forlag inthe TECDIS unit 4 Start the S63 Chart Loader program 5 Navigate the file structure until you locate and select the usb dongle Telko Chart Loader v2 00 Load Charts Licenses View L
218. nstalling chart databases ESEG cece eeeeeeeeeees 137 6 1 1 Quick installation with Jeppesen SENC charts 137 6 1 2 Quick installation with Navtor Navstick 22 22 2 139 6 1 3 Quick installation with Neptune from Nautisk Forlag _ 141 6 1 4 Create the User Permit file ESE cece cece eee Gee 143 6 1 5 Standard chart installation with S63 Chart Loader 145 6 2 Updating chart databases 0 000 c cece ccc eee eee eee 154 6 2 1 Updating charts JeppesenSENC aaaaaa naana 154 6 2 2 Updating charts S63 Chart Loader AA 156 6 3 Chart corrections ESEG GE eee cece cece ee 157 6 3 1 T amp P for charts from Jeppesen EG 158 6 3 2 AlO for AVCS charts 2 159 6 3 3 Manual chart corrections c eee e eee e cece eie 163 6 3 Update OB ET GE DE KAM EE EG pad EG Ge 168 6 4 Delete chart databases SESSE SG SG SG ei 170 6 5 Chart Licenses coe cece cece e cece ce eeeeeeeeeeees 171 6 5 1 View your chart licenses in the TECDIS program 171 6 5 2 Chart licenses Jeppesen SENC 2222 2 e eee eee eee eee ee 172 6 5 3 Certificate for chart providers 2 c cece eeeeeeeeeeee 173 6 5 4 Dynamic Licensing _ EE cece EE Eie 176 6 6 IHO Chart library L A 179 6 6 1 lmporting S57data EE EES 180 6 6 2 Delete S57 chart databases SG SS eee eee 181 136 Chapter 6 Ch
219. o cursor position The EBL VRM origin point will no longer follow the cursor movements To go back to normal EBL VRM operaiton switch off EBL VRM and turn it back on again Temporary duick route route with route monitoring in three clicks EBL VRM funksjonen kan ogsa benyttes til a generere en midlertidig rute Egen posisjon er startpunkt WP1 Plasser neste WP med venstre musetast WP2 og avslutt rute med hgyre musetast WP3 og svar bekreftende pa sparsmalet om a Aktivere ruteseilas Denne ruten fungerer som en vanlig 3 punkts rute men med det unntaket at den ikke kan lagres 95 Chapter 4 Navigation 4 3 4 Storage and export of Bearing Position and of Line Of Position LOP To save and export bearing lines right click on Bearing EBL VRM icon on the Main Toolbar to open the Bearing list window Da apnes Bearing list vinduet samtidig som alle lagrede peilings og stedlinjer vises i kartb ildet i ory m r GR 3 Eo Lyngs Ri j p dat VADEROBGA M op ab ng Aa G Ps A N 12 0kn ag 0 Ia 337 a Gi 7 N VaedHdof Paa l 2 Lyn oe fyi l o N Bearing list x 04 05 10 24 040 5 Vaederrbod lykt 04 05 10 23 016 0 Ale Ingen Slette VisEP Eksport Flytte All saved bearing lines are displayed on the chart On the far left of the window is the column for line selection The selected lines are displayed on the chart with a bold line and text
220. ogs Certificates Select Chart CD or Update Location 563 DL Nautisk Forlag Neptune found Test 4 7 2 15 Updated 22 05 2012 Updater5 TEST zip o9 My Computer d 8 Floppy A LOAD PERMITS AND CHARTS se Local Disk C Local Disk D 2 DVD RAM Drive E NEPTUNE FI About QUIT 6 The system automatically recognizes the files from Nautisk Forlag Press the LOAD PERMITS AND CHARTS button to start loading cell permits and charts into TECDIS 141 Telko Chart Loader v2 00 Loading chart cell 45 of 20649 Estimated time remaining 7 hours 17 minutes sie i licence verifying compiling loaded successfully CA376807 000 Decrypting SSE 20 licence verifying compiling loaded successfully CA376808 000 Decrypting SSE 20 licence verifying compiling loaded successfully CA376808 001 Decrypting SSE 20 licence verifying compiling loaded successfully CA876811 000 Decrypting SSE 20 licence verifying compiling loaded successfully CA376819 000 Decrypting SSE 20 licence verifying compiling loaded successfully CA376820 000 Decrypting SSE 20 licence verifying compiling l 7 The charts are now loaded and a progress window appears You can abort the loading at any time by pressing the ABORT button in the top right corner In the progress window information about the chart cells t
221. okumenter LOAD CHARTS Show README TXT M Ignore 57 Import Errors Warnings Sonv Ericsson File Manager zi S 63 Source Found Primar BASE CD Issue WK49 07 Publication Date 05 12 2007 Number of cells 2065 2050 with valid cell permits Confidence of authenticity is High 6 ENGS are signed by Primar confirmed with trusted certificate 4 Data Server certificate is provided and matches a trusted certificate 1 Data is provided by a known data server 1 HO certificate is not provided 40 6 Now the chart media is being read and the authenticity information appear in S63 Chart Loader Confidence of authenticity decides the next steps A Confidence of authenticity is high 6 10 means that the source is secure and no further assessment is necessary Go to step 7 B Confidence of authenticity is medium 4 5 means that the sys tem does not recognize the source as very secure and the information stated in grey below has to be considered by the navigator If the source is considered safe by the navigator you can continue to step 7 If this cannot be considered safe please contact your chart provider for further support C Confidence of authenticity is low 1 3 means that the system recognizes the source as quite unsecure and the information stated in grey below has to be considered by the navigator If the source is considered safe by the navigator you can con
222. ological warnings and alerts Ice Ice rapports Search and rescue piracy and armed robbery SAR information Other messages system messages other navig Other ational aids sdoos 5 8 2 5 8 3 5 8 4 Radio channels In the mid left field you select which radio stations to retrieve data from all frequencies relate to the standard frequencies as NAVTEX and are given in KHz The international frequency is 518KHz where messages in English is transmitted while the 490KHz is used for local language trans 430 518 4209 missions and 4209 5 KHz is intended for tropical waters but not much used Older messages In the bottom left field you can set display of NEW Only unread messages are displayed h Only messages from the last 66 hours are displayed All All messages are displayed Show messages Messages are displayed when you press the entry for that message in the NAVTEX window A text field opens to the right in the window message text is shown Messages are closed again by pressing their entry once again sa ay JNorth STO user f vm leo d ME dh Ri Slam DO z a Ka fa a j N A o Y i gt a 1211156 UTC FEB 12 Wier WENORWEGIAN GALE WARNING NO 135 2 TORUNGEN AANA SIRA TODAY FRIDAY AND T TORUNGEN AANA SIRA TODAY FRIDAY AND THE NIGHT BETWEEN FRIDAY AND SATURDAY WESTERLY NEARHE NIGHT BETWEEN FRIDAY AND SATURDAY WESTERLY NEAR GA
223. on name Text stand ard Text other Full hazards display Shallow soundings Deep soundings All depth contours Hazard symbols Cables and pipes Bottom type Grid Lights character Light cursor info Active lights Active lead sectors Small vessels boats info Simplified symbols 7 3 4 Overview of available chart information Description When enabled displays all the standard text in the chart as countries cities islands and other place names Shows chart view informations other than that referred to above Shows the hazards placed displayed within safety contour and the isolated dangers placed outside the safety contour which are deeper than Safe depth Shows soundings shallower than Safe depth Shows soundings deeper than Safe depth Shows all depth contours even within the safety contour Sets the rule that all obstacles shallower than safety contour will appear with a special UNDERWATER HAZARD symbol Shows registered cables and pipelines Shows information about bottom types Shows information about chart grid Shows light character information in the chart NB some lights for example those with periods longer than 15 seconds are accompanied with text instead of active blinking Shows lights character information in a textbox when the cursor is placed over a light Shows lights blinking with right sequence and color as seen f
224. or are implemented but with lacking information It is also used to alert to changes that are so complex that new chart editions are needed to give full information ENC preliminary objects Preliminary notices that are specific to certain ENCs Displayed with the same colors as Preliminary notices but with EP instead of P in the name Vises med EP i navnet No Information objects Indicates an area on an ENC where there is no equivalent BA chart coverage of the area 160 6 3 2 4 Chapter 6 Chart installation and maintenance The AIO objects can be displayed in different manners 007 P 10 Text Area box with fill Area box without fill These display forms can be combined as you wish and they are set in the options panel in the AlO viewer Dette styres i AlO inspektgren Note that when details of an AlO notice are viewed this selected notice will be shown with all display manners activated and a red additional fill e r de krysshakkede linjer vises i omr det e tittelen pa AlO objektet vises med st rre tekst Note that AIO objects are only displayed in the charts tey are specified for This means that a chart sheet that is in a bigger scale than the object is scaled for will not display the object Review AIO information using AIO viewer When the query cursor tool is used on an AIO object the AIO viewer is opened with a separate window for the different tools and settings fo
225. or map databases simul taneously and seamlessly Typically it is using CM93 3 format provided by Jeppesen C MAP of a Professional World chart as basis as it provides global coverage of all relevant scales Officially approved charts ENC is a reduirement for ECDIS when paper charts are not used These charts are available in two ways Either precom piled in the Jeppesen C MAP SENC format System ENC or in uncom piled s57 standard format ENC which can be loaded and compiled through the S63 Chart Loader software S57 og S63 charts are identical however the S63 charts are encrypted To use ECDIS as a legal substitute for paper charts two conditions have to be met 1 The system must show the official ENC Electronic Navigation Chart issued by a national hydrographic authority for Norway Primar 2 These charts have to be updated regularly TECDIS automatically displays the best available charts Jeppesen C MAP ENC SENC is preferred and is shown where it is available otherwise charts from Jeppesen C MAP Professional CM 93 3 are used Important The TECDIS program will from version 4 7 x 18 start even if no chart database is installed selected This allows database synchronization with TELKO Synchronizer TECDIS is not an approved navigation tool for paperless sailing when no chart databases are selected or installed 25 1 2 1 About Chart Databases and Simplified ENC Distribution ENC data S 5
226. oundings Al depth contours Danger symbol CO Cables and pipes CO Bottom type Grid lines Lights character Lights cursor info CJ Active lights _ Active lead sectors O malleraftinfo 2 852 NT hao S 50 3 5 3 3 5 3 1 Chapter 3 The chart view On the button row below you will find five CRESCI YS different presets for the USER Mode Base displays a bare minimum of chart information Standard contain the same chart information as STD Mode 1 2 and 3 are user customizable presets On the bottom line you can select if you want to use S52 or INT1 present ation modes When using INT1 a warning is give Not official presentation The button to the far right determines the size of text and symbols in the chart In STD Mode this is set to 1 0 Full hazards display With Full hazards display on the hazards placed displayed within safety contour and the isolated dangers placed outside the safety contour which are deeper than Safe depth In STD mode this is turned off as standard but it can also be activated from the Chart menu tab Full safe hazards on anti grounding alarms In TECDIS it is possible to set the system to turn on full safe hazards when an anti grounding alarm is generated Depending on other settings in the Safe menu you will then be warned in good time before a grounding and get all necessary information for situation evaluation Auto safe hazards and Shallow soundings can be turn
227. out in then the box for Old Format must be selected for the data to be read it by the newer version of TECDIS SW The wrong choice in this box will result in an error and should be changed before retry Restrict selection data type You can now select which data you want to copy in out of the TECDIS unit Execute When you now have selected the function you want to use and added restrictions if needed you can start the copy process To start the process press the Execute button at the bottom of the Data menu tab A save open dialogue opens and you can select the file destin ation you want and finish the process Importing primary and secondary routes Primary and secondary routes are automatically available for the other TECDIS unit when they are connected to each other This is described in chapter 7 5 6 1 Manual route synchronisation see page 201 Route synchronisation TECDIS can transfer routes from primary to secondary TECDIS unit and vice versa in two different ways Both methods allows the operator to retrieve a planned active route for the current voyage on the secondary TECDIS unit if the primary TECDIS unit fails For this to work the following must be ensured 200 7 5 6 1 7 5 6 2 1 The TECDIS Setup field Data Export IP must contain the IP address of the other TECDIS unit 2 TECDIS units must use the LAN adapter intended for TECDIS net work and both devices must be connected to
228. peed e Depth e Wind e AIS e Radar etc ARPA EBL ROT Position and information both for the own vessel and other vessels appear on officially approved charts Electronic Navigation Chart ENC Scheduled Voyage Route is displayed and checked for depth and other hazards The voyage is monitored by e controlling position in relation to the Route Plan e controlling safe passage e controlling collision dangers Mio a TECDIS offers several advanced features such as e Dynamic licensing of ENC charts pay per view e Detailed weather overlay with customizable display and integration with the voyage planner e C routes Automatic generation of routes between a multitude of positions and harbours e Powerful voyage planning tool with both primary and secondary routes e Automatic antigrounding system with safety contour and safe depth settings that are both adjustable by the navigator e Tight integration with AIS and ARPA radar e Advanced sensor filters e Flexible saving of routes tracks symbols objects and log files e User friendly customizable and feature rich alarm system e Highly adjustable chart presentation e Custom made conning and docking modules e Automatic storage of all navigational data for playback at a later time e Radar overlay with Furuno radars e Track Control with adaptive autopilot 24 Chapter 1 TECDIS at a glance 1 2 Charts at a glance TECDIS is using chart data from multiple vect
229. point info window you press the button WPinfo If you are in that window you can change to the route info window by pressing the same button only now it will be labeled Route into In the waypoint info window you can do the following a change route name b seta warning before point for that waypoint c seta chart scale for that waypoint enter the following Scale 1 xxxxxx and replace xxxxx with desired chart scale 4 1 10 4 ETA calculation during route planning UKA 4 4 O WP5 O WPB mns 5 0kn 10NM When you draw a route you can calculate ETA speed and distance between two waypoints By right clicking two different waypoints or their numbers in the route planning table a calculator appears where you can set the desired speed and it calculates the expected time use The selected waypoints are colored green When the tool starts the last waypoint of the route is set as one of the two waypoints To exit the calculator right click one of the selected waypoints 81 Chapter 4 Navigation 4 1 11 Saving and exporting a route list By pressing the save edit and print route list button a new window will appear with a route list with waypoint details total voyage distance and total voyage time This list can be saved as a txt Ist or csv file When saved the file can be transferred to another computer for a printing b sending to the shipping company c assessment in excel or similar softwa
230. pops up at the bottom of the chart where a brief or detailed information text about the new object can be entered The short description is visible on the chart whilst the detailed description is hidden Also in the same pop up window by checking the feature box Fill the newly created surface can be shaded Click the left mouse button or the OK button when data is added to close this window 6 colour selection buttons These buttons show available colour choices for lines and areas Red colour indicates danger and the red objects will generate alarms when anti grounding alarm zone is overlapping with the object Red objects are also displayed regardless of symbol visibility status and filtering The above mentioned functions only works with symbols added by you Symbols placed in the charts by the chart provider cannot be edited 58 Chapter 3 The chart view 3 7 Chart orientation In TECDIS you can change the chart orientation freely between up to 5 modes By clicking either the text or the arrow besides it you will open a 17 dropdown list where you can select the orientation you want e NORTH standard e stands for north up and means that north will always be towards the top of the monitor regardless of own vessel course Will automatically be selected by the system if placed in STD mode e COURSE e stands for course up meaning that the current course the ves sel is travelling at will be shown towards the
231. proved the option the weather overlay button will I be available on the main toolbar B 1 1 1 Activate Weather Service subscription Your Weather Service subscription must be activated by Jeppesen Marine on their own servers and this does not affect the local TECDIS unit When a TECDIS device with a Weather Forecast subscription enabled requests weather data from Jeppesen Marine s servers their servers compare the eToken number to their eToken registry for subscription confirmation 247 B 1 2 How to download the Weather Service subscription Forecasts can be downloaded using either an Internet connection or via e mail Before the forecast can be downloaded subscription information must be obtained from Jeppesen Marine Both of these actions are performed from the Weather window Note that if you want to use an Internet connection the network administrator for the vessel should be consulted for information about the settings that apply to your vessel network This inform ation is needed in step 6 below B 1 2 1 Download procedure 1 Open the Weather window by pressing the Weather overlay button f on the main toolbar A message that No current weather Forecasts are available is displayed 2 Ignore this message by pressing the OK button Ver X KK 03 06 2007 13 16 08 ER DE elected Load Delete TIRK Gal Vind Alarmer Syiloner Details R 4 z a ba sd No Weather Forecast Files have been
232. r AIO 161 The AIO viewer has several parts AlO object list This list gives an overview of all AlO objects displayed in the current chart view Admiralty Information Overlay CAIO Notices E l lo x Name Desription Text Image Source Test tempnm LS SS test prelnm to be updated and deleted no info add Details Query Chart Options AID Status Query chart This button opens the regular query cursor tool and allows you to view information about other objects in the chart that are placed in the same position as the AlO object Detailed view When you press the Details button a more detailed view of the attributes and attached text images is shown You cycle between attributes text and images by selecting their appropriate tab Admiralty Information Overlay AID Notices a Attributes Text GB8TDSO1 TXT Image GB800801 TIF Object name 007 P 10 Type Preliminary Notice Information Test prelnm LS only ENC affected GB400797 Textual description GB8TDS01 TXT al Al0 Options T P EPNL VM A Texts Iv Areas iv Area fill Pictorial representation GB800801 TIF Find notice Details Query Chart 007 Overlay AIO Notices ng Overlay AIO Notices h Overlay All Notices Attributes Text 6B8TDSO1 TXT Image 6B800801 T1F Attributes Text GB8TDSO1 TXT image 6B800801 1IF Attributes
233. r defined keys 279 B 5 7Video switching 279 B 6Furuno RCU 018 GG SEG Gee 281 Some add ons require you to sign subscriptions while some are one time purchases Contact your local Furuno Norway dealer Furuno Norway or Telko AS for more information and purchase 245 B 1 Weather overlay Weather overlay includes advanced functionality that uses high auality weather prognosis data available as a subscription service from Jeppesen Marine Weather overlay can be configured by the TECDIS operator and includes both atmospheric data and detailed data on waves Weather overlay includes alarm functionality that is intuitive and allows an easy visual ization of the weather window and dangerous weather conditions pa rd STO ve Of OM OAAR SE 5 5 ae M ID fe et Pl TM VG IR He effisisllsienina eps 58 46 537 N Asats 010 41 692 E C06 120 HDG 2 25 S06 6 0 kn STW 5 5 kn Markor 55 22 588 N 018 12 548 E BRG 1 129 8 320 NM PTH 40 0 m Tide Servicemode OTe wa ba E V Swell Waves 10 6 1014 a 4 LAS ADi a f 7 Total Waves 05 4 1012 AP Ug NG NAA ta vreise Rt 15 06 2012 10 00 00 Mo E 10 12 1416 18 20220 24 6 8 0 12 4 16 182020246 Fri 15 06 Sat 16 06 Sun 17 06 Tipasse Markor info Synig 17 _ Data Enh sine Alarmer EE 21 vars Flo 3
234. re e only the csv file d loading in to DNV Navigator e only txt files e loading in to a TELchart ECS Planning Station e only Ist files Important When saving you can use file type to filter which file types are displayed in the folders This does NOT alter the file format used for saving the file that has to be changed manually in the file name field 4 1 12 Extending a route on A route that has only been partially finished before can be extended by selecting it and then selecting the route extension tool from the route planning toolbar This will reactivate the route edit mode and you will get the opportunity to add waypoints atfer the last added from the previous session 82 4 1 13 Modify waypoints directly in the charts fr To change an existing route select the desired route to be changed and then press the route modify button on the route planning toolbar This will reactivate the route edit mode and you will get the opportunity to do the following Left click with the cursor placed on the desired way Move a waypoint point move the cursor to the new position and left click again to set the waypoint placement Delete a way Right click with the cursor placed on the desired way point point Left click in the route leg line between two waypoints to add a waypoint Move the cursor to the desired position for that waypoint and left click Add a waypoint on a route leg End edit mode Press the OK butto
235. re information about Furuno RCU 018 and TECDIS Keypad can be found in appendix B 33 2 2 Navigating menus and tools TECDIS has icon based tools and all user controlled settings are placed in menu tabs Below is a description of how to navigate your TECDIS 2 2 1 Chart panning When you move the cursor to one of the edges of the chart view it will 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 4 change shape to a directional arrow and by left clicking the mouse you will move the chart view in the arrow s direction Alternatively you can pan the chart with the arrow keys on your keyboard If you move the pointer to a corner in the chart view you will be able to pan diagonally in the chart Zooming in the chart To zoom into the chart you place the pointer where you want the centre point of the new chart display to be and click on the left trackball button To zoom out from the current chart display click on the right trackball button The new chart display will centre around the point where the mouse pointer was Set chart center To move a point in the chart view to the centre of the chart view you move the pointer to that point and click the middle mouse button Activating functions tools Activating tools and functions in TECDIS is done by moving the pointer to the icon of that function tool and left clicking Ved a venstreklikke starter du funksjonen Some icons have secondary functionality this functionality is a
236. red cross with circle is set in the chart center to mark the exact point that the timeline shows data from e Ship pos Timeline updated continuously as own ship position is changing e Cursor pos Timeline updated continuously as the cursor is moved in the chart If one of the mouse buttons are pressed the timeline is locked to the cursor position and the dropdown menu selection changes to Chart centre e Route 1 e Route 2 Pressing Ctrl S keys simultaneously while the timeline is shown generates an image of the current graph that can be stored in the desired location 6 Choose weather data to be displayed in the timeline by selecting the respective checkboxes in the selection field In this field there are the following choices e Pressure shows the graph of air pressure in the selected unit mm Hg or hPa e Temp shows the graph of temperature in the selected unit Celsius Fahrenheit or Kelvin e Wind shows true wind speed in the selected unit Knots M s meters per second mph miles per hour or Beaufort e Rain Snow shows the graph of precipitation in the selected unit Millimeters or Inches e Swell Waves graph shows swell in the selected unit Meters or Feet e Total Waves graph shows the accumulated waves in the selec ted unit Meters or Feet e Alarm Zone visualizes guard zones in activated route This is shown in color on the bottom of the x axis e When data is not available it is displayed in gray 262
237. reminder of this is shown in the upper part of the anti grounding chart A question mark indicates that the route safety check has been completed and the dangers and cautions list can be displayed x Alert object type Depth chart The list of hazards and alerts Route Alerts it is a table where e The first column contains the identification number of each way point the warning danger relates to accompanied by the sign indicates that the warning applies to the route leg between two way points while the sign shows that the warning is concerning a turn wheel over with a single waypoint e the second column gives a short description of the item followed by the object s depth if available 92 e the last column gives information about the chart database where the object originated N N 60 The warnings highlighted in yellow are listed first Then follows a list of all the dangers on the route which are a highlighted in red By clicking on one of the Ed L yellow warnings an information window with more info details and a description of that warning area opens PT 6 Underwater awash rock 12 Professionals All the warnings are also marked on the chart display with red markings when the clicking on the notification in the list This is the modality to get a quick visual overview of where the dangers are If the current way point is outside the displayed section the chart
238. removes EBL2 if EBL1 is active y Activated the userdefined function F1 and F2 is defined in the setup menu tab in the auxilary dropdown list Activated the userdefined function F1 and F2 is defined in the setup menu tab in the auxilary dropdown list Acknowledges alarms generated by TECDIS A red background light in button is visible and an alarm sound is audible when there is a system failure Press ALARM ACK to silence the alarm sound The button will appear in red until the cause of the problem is found and corrected Displays radar overlay and settings panel for radar overlay adjustment colour and transparency Standard display presentation STD S52 for TECDIS Brings up the symbols lines and areas menu mariner Ak objects Toggles between day dusk Dag H and night modes of display Select presentation mode north course heading radar Nord 1 and radar 2 Center the chart view on the latest selected VRM EBL If no VRM EBL are present center the chart view on own ship 282 5 JKL SCROLL 6 MNO RECORD 7 PQRS PLAN 8 TUV MONITOR 9 WXYZ NEXT CANCEL SENSOR O space CU TU R SHIFT HELP MENU RANGE MOB EVENT TARGET DATA GAIN A C RAIN A C SEA Appendix B Optional add ons Show on screen keypad for chart w l Kd panning If the button is pressed while the on screen keypad for J gt chart panning is active the system d d CN
239. rip point Click the OK button or right mouse button to finish the line wae When begin to draw an item a window will open in the lower part of the chart Here you can register a brief or detailed information text about the new object The short text is visible on the chart whilst the detailed description is hidden Press Enter or OK button when data is entered to close the window Position Line bearing line To mark a bearing position in the chart N select Position line drawing feature and activate the drawing mode by clicking Draw new icon When the start point of the bearing position is placed on the chart by clicking the left mouse button a small window opens where a specified angle can be entered and so locking the bearing line Left click again to place the end point of the bearing position and a new window will open in the lower part of the chart where a brief or detailed information text about the new formed object can be entered a x IM 14 2 8 4 5 6 7 8 8 0 4 1 exs a a ei EE ta a wje r t y u iJo p a Valse fl ol nl ilu o a enter a Ted o vJo n m sn OK Kartdata Bildefile Ctri lt took tft Up on Rt Click the left mouse button or the OK button when data is entered to close the window Marked area multi point area This button is used to enter multi point multiple line areas After the first point is placed in the chart a window
240. rmation but an Track Headin alarm is still active this alarm will still be shown If several confirmed alarms are active the warning field will show the text ALARMS When Varsel Pali 2 Vis no alarms are active and no notices require confirmation by the navigator the warning field will be blank When several notices require confirmation they are presented for confirmation in the following order 1 Alarms 2 Warnings presented with audible signal 3 Warnings presented without audible signal Each warning group is sorted chronologically Alarms warnings and notifications are presented in the following manner 99 4 5 1 Chapter 4 Navigation Audible Warning field Alarm list signal Yes i oe mo tooo EE Message Not displayed Black text No The colour palette will change when screen is set to dusk and night mode For unconfirmed alarms an audible signal will be presented through the sound source specified in TECDIS Setup Note that it is possibble to activate Standby Mode if this is marked as allowed in TECDIS Setup In this mode no audible signals will be generated A protruding and blinking standby mode window will be shown in the chart view when Standby Mode is activated Confirm alarms and warnings Alarms and warnings will remain unconfirmed until they are confirmed by the navigator and will be visible as long as the alarm and or warning state is active Notifications requir
241. rmit file provided by the data supplier SSE 11 Cell Permit file contains no permits Contact your data supplier and obtain a new permit file SSE 12 Cell Cause The saved Cell Permit files are not readable by the system The saved Cell Permit files are not readable by the system No TELKO eT code plug is connected to TECDIS or is defective During loading The required Cell Permit file was not found or could not be loaded Under erasure The required Cell Permit file was not found or is already deleted The specified Cell Permit file contains no Cell Permit During S63 startup The saved Cell Permit has Action Stop Chart S63 Loader delete the file C Program Files TECIDS S63SYS PMT DAT and load all Cell Permits again Check that TELKO eT code plug is connected to the system and that a small red light is showing on it Take it out of the usb port and set it back in again If this did not help try another usb port If this still does not help contact a TECDIS servicepartner During loading Check that the file exists and is readable by copying it to a temporary location Under erasure Stop and restart Chart S63 Loader and check the Cell Permit list under the Licenses tab If the Cell Permit which was deleted is still visible in the Cell Permit list delete this file C Program Files TECIDS S63SYS PMT DAT and download all the Cell Permits again Contact t
242. roll wheel When the Scroll Wheel Zoom check box is enabled the zoom scroll wheel if available is used to change the chart scale F1 and F2 key settings Selecting this opens the F1 F2 key settings tool If a Furuno RCU 018 or a TECDIS Keypad is connected to the chart system the operator will here be able to assign the F1 and F2 keys found on those control units oF CF X Scale W 100M The F1 and F2 function keys can be configured as the following Function Description Chart le W ee Set the chart scale to 1 100 000 000 1 100M Chart scale W Set the chart scale to 1 20 000 000 1 20M Chart le A ele Set the chart scale to 1 3 000 000 1 3M Chart scale B Set the chart scale to 1 1 000 000 1 1M Chart le C ie Set the chart scale to 1 300 000 1 300 000 eise De Set the chart scale to 1 100 000 1 100 000 dd 191 Chapter 7 System settings Chart scale E Set the chart scale to 1 30 000 1 30 000 Chart scale F Set the chart scale to 1 10 000 1 10 000 hah EG Set the chart scale to 1 3 000 1 3 000 Ng Chart content Show chart content for the current chart view Chart Basic Set the chart view to basic mode Chart selection 1 Set the chart view to user defined mode 1 Chart selection 2 Set the chart view to user defined mode 2 Chart selection 3 Set the chart view to user defined mode 3 ESCAPE function Emulates the ESCAPE key on the keyboard Insert manual pos Allows the navigator to move the chart display to a ition spe
243. rom own vessel Extension of lead sectors covering the vessels current position out from the light Shows useful information for light and small vessels such as port info etc Shows simplified 552 standard chart symbols not INT 1 195 Chapter 7 System settings Chart Ouality Shows labels for quality on chart Labels Simple In the chart shows all lines and boundaries as simple border lines drawing National Show the location names in the language the chart was name produced in Additional Marks objects in the chart with where additional info information is available All time Showing all temporary periodic or otherwise time limited limited chart objects with no link to the current date time 7 3 5 Chart data information By clicking on down in the left OTTERS x corner in the Chart menu folder a _DEt10000 No2B0416 DK2NORSO DK2SKARK 1 4 gt new information window is open TEGDIS software Ver 4 7 2 23 55003 0 1 0 Dataset DK2SKARK 000 There is a tab older for each Producer 8 Kort 0g Matrikelstyrelsen KMS De available chart on display Area Quality Map centered in zone of confidence B corresponding to each chart is Rating Official Compilation scale 1 180000 Depth units Metres IHO presentation library version Meters number is displayed as standard text Sounding datum Mean sea level EE a Magnetic variation Not specified on windows titl
244. rred correctly from one TECDIS to the other get an error mes sage when try to save the route can t save my past track get the message not official display when use INT1 chart view The AIS button on the main toolbar is greyed out does not work The Radar button s on the main toolbar is greyed out does not work Cause Solution Route activation alternatives are not set up correctly For more information see chapter 4 1 7 on page 75 The TECDIS certificate MED B only has to be valid until the unit is installed If new hardware is installed example monitor an updated certificate has to be downloaded from http telko no site support Install and activate viewing of the following Tides in TECDISis a chart databases service by Jeppesen e Professional e JeppesenPrimar Your route database might be corrupted Contact us at support telko no for further Instructions Your track database might be corrupted If you have any doubts about the chart inform ation you are viewing in INT1 mode switch to S52 mode for confirmation S52 is the only presentation method approved as standalone You can still use other presentation modes as long as you have the option of switching back to 552 when you desire INT1 is not approved as the sole mode of presentation of charts a contact your Furuno Norway dealer for purchase b Check that your TECDIS license has the add on s acti
245. rs displaying the route leg safety status Corridor colour Explanation The route leg is safe and there are no warnings for this route leg turn Chart objects with warnings are found in this route leg turn Grey Danger objects are found in this route leg turn The safety check for this route leg has failed Split the route leg in two If the last waypoint is within a distance of 0 1 Nm from the first waypoint the route will be generated as a circle Automatic route check only happens if Auto route activation is selected in the Safe menu tab ET Chapter 4 Navigation 4 1 4 Activating the selected route You can activate you selected route in several ways both automatically and manually This table provides an overview Automatic activation when inside the route corridor Manual activation when inside the route corridor Automatic activation with placing of additional waypoint creating a route leg from the vessel position to a user selectable place on the route Manual activation activation with placing of additional waypoint cre ating a route leg from the vessel position to a user selectable place on the route For this to be possible the auto route activation has to be selected in the Safe menu tab Is done by pressing the activate route button on the route planner toolbar For this to be possible the auto route activation has to be selected in the Safe menu tab and Allow route activ a
246. rt Loader in general Cell Permits are the chart licenses used for chart cells added to TECDIS in an S63 chart database Before a chart providor can issue Cell Permit files for your S63 chart databases a User Permit file has to be created The USTECDISer Permit fTECDISile is unique for each unit and is generated by the S63 Chart Loader In this process encrypted data from your license key is used The chart provider has to recieve your unique User Permit file to create Cell Permits for your charts To create a User Permit do the following 1 Insert a TECDIS Service Key in an available usb port in the TECDIS unit 2 Wait until the Service mode label appears in the bottom right corner of the chart view and then you exit the TECDIS program 3 Start the S63 Chart Loader program 4 Goto the Licenses tab B Load Charts Licenses View Logs Certificates Generate User Permit Add Cell Permits No Permits are installed Delete Selected Permits Delete Expired Permits Press the Generate User Permit button 143 Specify location far User Permit File name Telko eT 50653 User Perm event eth2070 tet event eth2559 tet oslo kiel bet a Pa Save file as lupe User Permit Test File 2x Folders DOE ok ER R Cancel EI SOS 7 Spesifiser Service Key C3 50653 primar og trykk OK for a lagre C1 50653 software mog va Drives Eed f SERYILE K
247. rt update in the Chart Utilities dropdown list 2 Anew window appears Here you can select between three actions A Auto Updating lets you perform an automatic update of the installed charts TECDIS will then collect the needed inform ation from Jeppesens server by itself Go to step 3 B Semi Auto chart update lets you perform a semi automatic chart update The system will create order files for the charts you select and you can send the files from another computer to Jeppesen The answer files are then imported into TECDIS Go to step 4 C Updating Log Review Updates which gives you an overview of all changes made to the chart databases Ga til punkt 5 for videre prosedyre 154 C Map CM33 3 update send email update orders to updates c map no Fi Databases Professional Auto Updating Use HTTP protocol Use Network SemiAuto Downloadupdates Gatsize Updating Updating Log l Review Updates Processing 3 01 06 2012 07 20 17 582 updates were received from 582 sent by server 109 Kb transferred Chapter 6 Chart installation and maintenance For automatic update do the following A B C D The progress will now be displayed in the dropdown list at the Select the desired chart database from the dropdown list Make sure Use HTTP Protocol is selected Press the Download Updates button bottom of the window A confirmation window appears when the update is complete Press OK to finish the update
248. rted by different parameters such as owner to from and name ID These parameters are chosen between in a separate dropdown list appearing besides the sort search selector When you have found the desired route in the dropdown list you simply press it and then press a OK to select that route for sailing b To select the same route but with opposite direction of travel press the Return button Use the route dropdown list with search activated Now a search field is available next to the sort search selector In it you write the desired search term and use the dropdown list now consisting of search parameters to set the parameters for the search The dropdown list will fill up with search results as you type When you have found the desired route in the dropdown list you simply press it and then press a OK to select that route for sailing b To select the same route but with opposite direction of travel press the Return button Use the route selector tool directly in the charts With the route organiser window open the cursor changes shape to a boathook and all available si NG routes are shown in the charts You can now find the desired route in the chart and select it using the cursor a Left click to select the route for sailing b Right click to select the same route but with opposite direction of travel The direction of the selected route is shown with arrows placed on the route line 4 1 8 2 Exporting
249. s C Map chart update Check licenses INT 1 Dictionary Radar overlay setup Chart utilities kd ER SS ee The dropdown menu Auxilary contains 1 Recalibrate screen i Conning harbour mode Roralihrate screen 2 3 Conning backward mode Conning harbour mode 4 Export DB status Conning backward mode 5 F1 F2 key functions Export DB Status 7 2 1 Ship draught Here you can set a value with intervals of 0 1 meter that is between minimum draught and maximum draught On system startup TECDIS uses 186 the maximum draught as standard but this can be changed in the Setup menu to match changes in vessel loading conditions There is therefore no need to make changes in the TECDIS Setup program after loading or unloading the vessel The value for the draft is used by TECDIS to interpret sonar data automatic routing and eventual display in Conning image 7 2 2 Language Standard language for a TECDIS unit is English which is also consistent with the language of the Windows Operating System But for normal operation of TECDIS it is also possible to switch languages in the Operator Controls Tools and menus to Norwegian French and German may be available depending on the SW version Language can be changed during navigation and will not affect the Chart Data 7 2 3 Time zone adjustment Standard time in TECDIS corresponds to the time received from the GPS satellites which corresponds to UTC time If a vesse
250. selected in the Chart Menu tab 158 6 3 2 6 3 2 1 6 3 2 2 Chapter 6 Chart installation and maintenance AIO for AVCS charts In TECDIS you can with AVCS charts from UKHO get access to temporary and preliminary notices from Notice to Mariners This information is available as a separate layer for the S63 GB database see 7 3 2 Selectable layers see page 194 for more information on layers With AVCS charts this functionality is only available from TECDIS SW ver 4 7 2 23 and newer In addition TECDIS AIO Update has to be installed Loading AIO AIO is loaded in TECDIS with the S63 Chart Loader Follow the same procedure as for standard chart installation with S63 Chart Loader The only difference is that when you have selected the correct AIO source in the file tree the source is automatically recognized as AIO and this is displayed in the name of the installation media Telko Chart Loader v2 6 0 AE ag b Jf A Load Charts Licenses View Logs Certificates Select Chart CD or Update Location 5 68 Source Founi UKHO Admiralty Information Overlay AIO k15 14 5 as Computer ea ie 10 04 2014 s amp Local Disk C er otoa 4 with valid cell permits 1 updates i l een Confidence of authenti a VES ENGS are signed by IHO High 9 USB DISK F Data Server certificate is sari with trusted certificat a d A0 S631 1 CD WK16 14 Data is provided by a known dataa e Removable Disk G IHO certif
251. sition UAIS VHF Data link own vessel report Radar ARPA 1 and Radar ARPA 2 1 S TTM Tracked Target Message Radar Cursor 1 and Radar Cursor 2 1 S RSD Radar System Data AIS 1 Al AIS UAIS VHF Data Link Depth 1 S DPT Depth 2 S DBT Depth below transducer 220 A 3 1 3 A 3 1 4 Appendix A TECDIS Setup Input port In the dropdown menu Input port the physical serial port IP port for the chosen sensor is selected TECDIS has 6 12 COM ports and 4 IP ports When the desired input port is selected the letter for the entry in the sensor table for this sensor will become e unaltered white if the sensordata received do not match the con figuration in TECDIS Setup e green if the sensordata match the specified sensor e red if the port is already selected for another sensor An example To obtain positiondata from a GPS the settings can be as follows 1 Select Position 1 or Position 2 in the Se ect sensor column 2 Select the port COM or IP where you have connected the GPS in the port field 3 Select the NMEA sentence type the GPS transmits 4 It could also be beneficial to describe the sensor as a GPS in the Sensor description field If the system loses connection to the sensor during sailing TECDIS will sound an alarm The alarm will display both data type eg position 1 port eg COM 3 and the description entered eg GPS IP ports For each IP port an IP address and an IP port number has to be gi
252. sk Install a new Database remove a Database Copy or update an existing base with a new CD Press the Copy chart Database to Harddisk button A new window appears in SeTECDIStup Select source CD usb dongle where the chart database you want to installed is placed If you use a usb dongle the chart database has to be placed on the root folder of that dongle Alternatives Start Update existing Database with new CD C Remove Delete this Database from the harddrive C Set as Default Set this Database as default Select one of the alternatives install update remove or Set as Stand ard e Select install if available e Selec t updat e if available Press the Start button to start installation When the system is finished with the automated part of the chart installation a window will appear Press OK in that window 138 Chapter 6 Chart installation and maintenance 6 1 2 Quick installation with Navtor Navstick If you use charts from Navtor with the Navstick service TECDIS offers a quick chart installation from the S63 Chart n LT IR ad ed Loader program Before you begin acduire Cell Permits Installation of chart with S63 Chart Loader requires Cell Permits for licensing Cell Permits are received from your chart provider For your chart provider to give you correct cell Permits you have to prepare and send your unique User Permit to your provider The procedure for preparing
253. st mtr is specified the length of the line in meters The last column contains the text that was entered in the Notes field in the Bearing list window All bearings and or Lines of Position are saved and available in the Bearing list until are removed by operator Deletion of data is performed using the Delete function and it can be done without further verification 97 Chapter 4 Navigation 4 4 Anti grounding When the vessel s speed over ground SOG is over 1 0 knots the system will oversee a safety zone in front of the vessel and notify all the hazards objects and areas with special conditions The angle and extent of this security zone is set up in the Safe menu The vertical menu includes an anti grounding chart display showing the safety zone at all times is fixed to course up mode If any hazards are detected the following actions are triggered e ananti grounding alarm starts e the anti grounding chart will highlight the dangerous chart objects within the safety zone e the safety zone will be in the main chart display e if the main chart display has been repositioned away from the own vessel position the chart center will be moved back to the own ves sel position if Auto Safe Hazards is set to Auto On or Auto On Off then the Safe Hazards and Shallow Soundings options in the Chart menu are turned on at the first warning if they were not selected already e Until the anti grounding
254. t 2001 Radar arpa2 TIM IP2 192 168 0 283 2001 Radar 2 Radar cursor1 RSD P2 1924680 288 2001 Radar 1 lp Serial port activity Radarcursor2RSD P2 1921680283 2001 Radar 2 E Bo Ma NN NB Alxxx IP1 192 168 0 71 50000 AIS Depth DPT P2 1921680238 2001 Sounder Received data on selected port Test Clear Log Bel wind MWV IP2 1921680288 2001 Wind Route RTE WPL IP2 1924680 288 2001 RIE Monitor ctrl Hatte Com2 9600 Main display Alarm ctrl Digi Alarm central Controlunit Rcu18 Furuno keyboard Trackcontrol GNS Simrad AP80 Navtex NRX Simulator Camera Curr Current Night Nav The table on the left of the tab displays the current configuration and is immediately updated if alterations are made to the input and output tabs in the upper right part of the NMEA Data tab The dropdown list for the input field will impact the display of available alternatives in the other dropdown lists in the input tab aiding you in setting the configurations correctly Note Descriptions in this chapter are presented as information only Only authorized service technicians can reconfigure the settings in the NMEA Data tab A 3 1 NMEA Input Note All positions sent to TECDIS from external sensors have to be in the WGS 84 format Use this tab in the NMEA Data tab to configure input signals Select the data type you want to configure This is done by selecting it in the table to the
255. t S63 Loader delete the file C Program Files TECIDS S63SYS PMT DAT and load all the Cell Permit again During loading Check that the file is actually a Cell Permit file If this is confirmed contact the Cell Permit supplier and ask for a new Cell Permit file Set the correct system date If the problem persists contact an authorized TECDIS service partner Obtain a valid Cell Permit from the chart supplier and enter them in the S63 Chart Loader Try loading the charts again If it is still not functional contact your chart provider 304 Appendix D Troubleshooting SSE 15 One or more ENC subscriptions in this cell permit file have expired One or more of the Cell Please contact Permits have expired your data supplier to renew the subscription licence SSE 15 All ENC subscriptions for this ENC media All Cell Permits for ENC have expired cells which are avail Please contact able on chart media your data CD ROM USB memory supplier to renew stick etc are expired Obtain a valid Cell Permit from the chart the subscription supplier and enter them in the S63 Chart licence Loader SSE 15 Subscription for this ENC has Cell Permit for the expired Please specified chart cell is contact your data expired and ENC cell supplier to renew has not been loaded the subscription licence WARNING SSE 15 One or more ENC subscriptions have expired Contact your data supplier for
256. t connections All Input ports settings that is not used should be set to There are some predefined in outputs on the different TECDIS models which vary The following COM ports are predefined and can not be used as NMEA I O Model ports TECDIS 2138AA and COM 1 amp 3 are RS 232 2138AD COM 2 is set for the Furuno Keyboard COM 1 is RS 422 non isolated not valid for TECDIS 2424 NMEA COM 2 is RS 232 TECDIS 2140 COM 1 2 amp 3 are RS 232 222 Appendix A TECDIS Setup A 3 1 8 COM port for Monitor ctrl Select the COM port for the serial cable from the monitor This connection will control the monitor background light and calibration settings as well as the alarm sounder in the screen unit if used Ensure that the power supplied to the monitor is from the same source UPS mains socket etc as for the TECDIS A 3 1 9 COM port for Alarm ctrl Select the COM port that should be used for the alarm central interface if used Er det ikke koblet til noen alarmsentralinterface settes denne til Velg COM porten som skal brukes til alarmsentralen grensesnitt hvis tilgjengelig In the NMEA sentence pull down menu there are two choices Digi and ALR e ALR will set the port up to serial NMEA communication with the alarm central e Digi option should be used when connected to a proprietary alarm interface TEA 01 which is an open close relay contact A 3 1 1
257. t the list itself The targets keep their position in the list and no new targets are added to the list With this functionality you can monitor vessels directly from the AIS target list for shorter periods After 3 minutes of inactivity the list returns to dynamic normal mode and the list is updated as before This also happends when you scroll back to the top of the list and when you press one of the column headers 128 Chapter 5 Other functions 5 5 AIS vessel monitoring It is possible to configure TECDIS with vessel monitoring via AIS This functionality gives you warnings or alarms when the course vector of an AIS target intersects a line area in the chart that is marked Danger AIS vessel monitoring has to be set up by a service technician Contact your TECDIS dealer or direct for installation of this function ality This function has no user controls and it will remain in same mode until the TECDIS technician makes a change again 8 A N 17 GF GY P NG INE LP Mo H PO NAN pa ITO Ha a 2 a M45 p AM sad EE V AA fi HAAG Fjo g WAWA Pasali AT TT bk 1 This function is disabled in default setting 2 When the Ais vessel watch is set to 1 a warning is displayed if a vessel s course vector crosses a line or edge of a hazardous area The warning is
258. ta Server certi Et Data Server sertifikat er inkludert pa kart ficate is provided CD en og er identisk med et av de forhandsin and matches a stallerte og klarerte sertifikater This is an trusted certi additional confirmation of the chart media ficate authenticity Is the chart provider Data server code preregistered in TECDIS Data is not Kartleverandgren Data Server er ikke regis provided by a trert i TECDIS The chart provider has to be known data assessed manually server TECDIS har liste over kjente S63 kartlever andgrer Data Server Kart CD en er utstedt av en leverandgr i denne listen noe som er en positiv indikator pa ekthet Data is provided by a known data server Is a valid IHO certificate included on the chart media IHO certificate is Authenticity has to be assessed manually not provided IHO certificate is TECDIS finner et IHO sertifikat pa kart CD en men det matcher ikke det forhandsinstallerte og klarerte serti fi katet Authenticity has to be assessed manually provided but does not match trusted IHO certi ficate IHO certificate is TECDIS finner et IHO sertifikat pa kart CD en provided and som matcher det forhandsinstallerte og matches trusted klarerte sertifikatet noe som er en positiv IHO certificate indikator pa ekthet Additional authentication information that is only displayed if necessary ENC signature Kart CD en inkluderer ikke signaturfiler for
259. tain up to 4800 letters Own objects containing additional information is marked with an exclamation mark in the chart view If the Mariner object window is displayed but you wanted access to the chart inspector window you can easily switch by pressing the Chart data button at the bottom of the window JPEG image files on the system hard drive can be attached to own objects in the chart To attach an image you press the Image file button and select the image The text in the Mariner object window will now include the name of the image file The image is shown by pressing the Image file button 118 Chapter 5 Other functions 5 2 Conning and anchor 5 2 1 watch The Conning Display button in the Main Toolbar is used to display a mini conning image in the lower left corner of the screen Alternatively an anchor watch display can be selected by right clicking the icon Conning display for mooring By left clicking the Conning display button in the main toolbar a mini conning display is shown The feature gives excellent viewing of e movement e course e wind information that is essential to manoeuvring when mooring If placing the pointer in the conning image outside the number areas left clicking and holding will allow you to move the conning image position to other parts of the display The wind direction can be toggled between the true and relative mode by clicking on the wind vane When
260. take advantage of positioning based on manual observations and dead reckoning In the tab LOP you can determine the Bestikk LOP ship s position based on observations made with Bearings and or Distance Peiling The bulk of this tab is set aside for gt 1300 4 13 06 2 44 Stake Molvikgrunnen registration of bearing and distance F 9228 18 05 8 88 Varde Moeen observations Up to three of each can be recorded on each recording line gt M 22NM 13 06 8 28 Boye 28 nord control set and information from left Sett Vis Verdi Tid Alder Tekst Minisize 269 3 13 05 3 52 Fyret Steinngrunn Auto 2xL0P M Auto0R T Extend LOPS Flytte Distanse m 10NM 18 06 3 06 Markor overett nord Marker EP Velg EP for DR Auto DR DR ay Nullstill to right An button to set a record A check box to select whether registration should be displayed on the chart or not The value of the recorded bearing distance Time of registration Age of the registration Text that describes the registration eg Observational method 4 7 2 1 Register observations 1 2 Press the button on the desired entry line Place the cursor over the target the chart object the bearing or dis tance is measured to on the chart which is observed and click the left mouse button An EBL VRM function electronic bearing line and variable dis tance marker is now enabled anchored to
261. te navn 20120427 Tjoeme Danmark New Stop C Eget skip posisjon P C Spesifisert posisjon Set Land Denmark i Havn Restrictions Ad Del Flere valg Keyboard LAG RUTE Avbryt etails for ANHOLT Country Denmark Max Depth 3 4 m Assist Tugs Port Size Unknown Ed Kia Wel com english gen info ports port_angola htm cabinda Email http home houston rr com nugent durres_html Chart The route proposition takes traffic separation systems into account along with all other chart functions and the vessel draught when calculating the route This functionality can shorten the route planning process and help minimise the navigator workload significantly The C Routes library is developed by Jeppesen Marine and aids the navigator in the route planning process The most important feature is the ability to swiftly calculate the shortest possible route between two ports The route calculation is based on matching requirements given by the vessel with the territorial limitations along the planned route 69 4 1 5 2 Chapter 4 Navigation Start C Routes Bc In the route planning toolbar press the C routes button A window will 4 1 5 3 4 1 5 4 4 1 5 5 open with the C Routes planning tool The planning tool is divided in to several fields e Route name e Options e New Stop e Keyboard e Restrictions e CREATE Route name In this field you add the name you want for your route Use termino
262. tems and ECDIS is and what a TECDIS system is In short TECDIS is a certified electronic chart and navigationsystem ECDIS Electronic Chart and Display Information System for navigation voyage planning and voyage monitoring TECDIS is certified by the ECDIS standard as specified by IMO and the SOLAS convention The installation of the TECDIS system can be configured for paperless sailing Flagstates and vessel classes have different requirements for backup solutions for paperless sailing Check the requirements for your vessel by the flag state or vessel class before configuring your TECDIS for paperless sailing Vessels registrered in Norway can contact Sjafartsdirektoratet the Norwegian Maritime Authority ID a Chapter 1 TECDIS at a glance 1 1 The ECDIS system NMEA I O 4 ports gt 230V AC O 24V DC EE sie IE EE EE BE EIE AE EE EN LIE Se DELE TEID DA EIE EI EIE EE TITT TECDIS Service Key USB extension port UU MET External DVD drive optional TECDIS is designed and developed in accordance with IMO specifications and emphasizes on simple and user friendly operations without comprom ising the functional requirements TECDIS is based on computer units that are approved for maritime use and tailored to meet the requirements of the ECDIS standards TECDIS collects information from instruments and sensors for e Position e COUrse e S
263. ter the route has been drawn by hovering the cursor over the selected waypoint 87 Chapter 4 Navigation 4 2 Route navigation 4 2 1 When activating a selected route TECDIS enters navigation mode giving you all necessary information to steer the vessel according to the route you have created Navigation information When a route is activated and you have entered navigation mode a navig ation information window will appear in the bottom of the information panel 1 Route name see Route name text field on text field page 90 Toogles between showing WP end WP DTG and ETA for the entire Tiome Wolfvil 2 route and your selected way X point You select the waypoint in the chart by clicking it ETA 01 14 43 EE TTT NAG WIP 2 Planned speed Lets you switch between CTs 190 1 2297 3 Present planned and present speed DIG 0 76 NM speed for ETA calculation TTG A min 34 5 A DIG Remaining distance Distance XTE Dev ToGo oo B1 5 ETA Estimated time of arrival Course to steer by and course 6 CTS for next route leg Remaining distance to the DTG next route leg Time to the next Wheel Over 8 TIG Point Time To Go The vessels position in the cor ridor is shown with red for port side and green for the Starboard side Position in the 9 route leg cor ridor Indicates Cross track error for the current course measured 10 XTE in the same unit as the cursor range see see EBL VRM Bear
264. tes SS EG Ge Ge 200 7 5 6 Routesvnebronisaton EE EE EG SE dag EE SS GR GE EE ee Ge Ge 200 7 5 6 1 Manual route synchronisation ESEG GE GG eee e cece eeeeeeeeeecccceeeeeeeeeeees 201 7 5 6 2 Automatic route synchronisation EE 201 Activate automatic replication 2 GE Gee 201 Disable Automatic Route Replication EG eee Laa Laa LLALLA LLALA Lanan aaa 202 7 6 The Log menu SG GEGEE Ge 203 16 lof le AA 203 7 6 2 Visual ReplaV EE es ed ee EE EG GE GE NG hand hk hn ALLAN nab 204 7 63 AA 205 71 64 Delte Old tos Data EE ES DEER KALONG EE som enon apa SE eae GA LAG AE GE Ge EE DEE 205 65 SCPC AA ie 205 TP INE Sarre MENU se keane natn ee EE Ee EO DS EE ee DE 206 7 7 1 Safe Deep and Shallow u EE Ee 206 7 7 2 Check time and angle anti grounding parameters 207 7 7 3 Auto Safe Hazard display setting O 208 7 7 4 Camera control formerly FLIR EE GE GE EE ee 208 NES EE ee AR EA RE N TA EE OR AO ON OE EE LE EE OE KEER 209 78 hie AlS me EE EE EE EE EE PE SE DEE EE RE Ee EE ND Ea Ge 210 7 6 IDispldV TEE samahang EE ee he Naa ee ana GE aaa Ge N nce aa 210 7 8 2 Lost active targets AA 210 7 8 3 DanserEPA all Tarfets on EE DE EE dn SE SERE GE Denia elo R E GE AG 211 JO MONTO Caup li ON ss EER AE EE EE a EE GE EE DE KA eee 212 7 9 1 Controlling the monitor contrast 212 BI NECKE EC os EE IE ee ee DE GE ED EE EE EE EE a 213 Appendix A TECDIS Setup GE Ge 215 A 1TECDIS Setup at a glan
265. that the Cyclone presentation is not available because there are no cyclones at this time No cyclones in effect at last download Communication Error There was a problem during the Weather data download You must be in show checkbox This message is due to a known error Update TECDIS software mode to set this date to the latest version ERROR Weather components There is a problem with C Map System files in the installation 308 are not initialized Weather Data Error The internal component processing the weather data cannot be created Cyclone Data Error The internal component processing the weather data cannot be created Weather Data Error License interface cannot be obtained Cyclone Data Error License interface cannot be obtained Weather Data Error File is not found Weather Data Error Corrupted or wrong format file Weather Data Error The file data cannot be accessed Weather Data Error Problems with weather data licensing Cyclone Data Error File is not found Weather Data Error Corrupted or wrong format file Cyclone Data Error Wrong format of cyclones data Cyclone Data Error Wrong point values in cyclones Cyclone Data Error The file data cannot be accessed Cyclone Data Error Problems with weather data licensing The specified file did not have a grb or xml extension Appendix D Troubleshooting Contact TECDIS service support for assistance
266. the TECDIS program Chart licenses are viewed in TECDIS by going to the menu tabs Here you select the Setup menu tab There you will find a dropdown list called Chart Utilities In that list select Check licenses A new window appears and displays All 3 licenses are valid for more than 14 days a list of all chart licenses entered in the TECDIS system e Licenses with a green back ground are valid more than 14 days beyond today e Licenses with a yellow background will expire within the next 14 days e Licenses with a red background are expired 171 6 5 2 Chart licenses Jeppesen SENC All functionality described in this chapter is valid for chart databases in the CM93 3 format distributed by Jeppesen C Map For chart databases in other formats S63 see chapter6 5 Chart Licenses see page 171 for more information Licenses for Jeppesen SENC is administered from the TECDIS Setup program 6 5 2 1 Adding a chart license To add a chart license do the following 1 10 11 12 13 14 Insert a TECDIS Service Key in an available usb port in the TECDIS unit Wait until the text label Servicemode appears in the lower right corner of the chart view Exit TECDIS Insert CD or usb dongle with the chart license s received from Jeppesen in the TECDIS unit If you have received a license code instead of a license file skip this part Start TECDIS Setup Go to the Licenses tab 1 I
267. the bottom half of the screen Changes depending on the activated tool Some function windows are placed elsewhere on the screen 36 Chapter 2 The basics 2 3 2 Own vessel position Own vessel position is displayed graphically with the shape that is set in the Ship menu 7 4 3 Viewing the double circle see page 197 Beam Line Heading Line Course Vector COG SOG Beam line amp Heading line Double circle Ship contour e Heading line indicates the present vessel heading e Beam line is perpendicular to the Heading line e The Course Vector indicates the current vessel course over ground COG The end point of this line shows where the vessel will be if the appointed course it is followed after a certain time minutes specified in the Ship menu e If Show Double Circle is selected in the Ship menu the vessel pos ition will be marked with a double circle e If Show ship contour is selected in the Ship menu the vessel s rel ative size compared to the chart scale will be displayed e If both options are selected the chart system will select the best dis play given the current conditions If both the double circle and ship contour is selected the system will automatically select which of the two symbols to display When the vessel symbol becomes to small TECDIS automatically switches to the circle symbol and opposite when a smaller scale is selected In all chart orientations except Head the charts will be static
268. the search NB By entering in the search field all installed AlO objects are displayed 6 3 3 Manual chart corrections Note When two TECDIS units are connected make sure to perform the same chart corrections on both units TECDIS has full support for automatic chart corrections but the manual corrections functionality is still important as local report on changes to charts can be left out of the official Notices to Mariners that are used as base for the automatic chart update 163 6 3 3 1 An example is that the SOLAS convention requires all charts to be updated for the planned voyage Before you plan your voyage it is strongly recom mended that both the automatic and manual chart correction function ality is used to keep the chart updated Display of manual chart corrections in the chart view All manual chart corrections are drawn in the chart with orange markings ET A Pi When you use the query cursor to a display chart information in the cursor NG a position a Chart Object Inspector D P window opens and manual corrections are shown with yellow markings in the A cb dy chart view ey A In the field to the right information M ee about the selected object is displayed Every change made to the object is shown in a separate entry in the list below the object By clicking one of the entries the object is displayed as it was in the selected configuration 164 Chapt
269. ther the maximum draught for vessels entering the port This information is displayed at the bottom part of the C Routes window Ports marked in red in the port of call list These ports have a maximum draught that exceeds the capacity of the port This port must either be deleted switched for an alternative port nearby or the navigator has to select ignore ship draft in the C Routes Options button Ports marked in yellow in the port of call list The port database does not have information on depth for the port To display a port from the port of call list in the chart view press the Chart Chart button at the bottom of the C Routes window Pressing this button will center the chart on the selected port 4 1 5 6 Restrictions add and delete When a Sea area bridges canals objects or Restrictions Add Del places are considered obstructions for the own vessel it can be inserted restrictions in the form of a red slash across those areas which C Routes will not take into the route calculation Adding and deleting these restrictions is done using the Add and Del buttons BEK KEER N Al N 3 die AN le Ad i 3 Bir a Sh A mimi 7 is I G j 1 nc 4 sy s Af EE AA KP OE Weed NMN TR J 4 1 5 7 Chapter 4 Navigation In an early planning stage you should zoom out in the chart so that the entire route can be visible When minimum two ports of call are set the C Route
270. tical weather prediction models that are available and are calculated up to several times daily When downloading a new forecast part of the data are selected from the latest weather prediction model Many of the models have a distance in kilometers in the model name example Global ECMWF 150 Km This indicates the distance between each data point being downloaded Similarly to zooming into a map image the data for each point between these data points will be calcu lated As a general rule a lower kilometer value gives a higher level of detail on the weather chart The main reason for choosing a model with a higher distance between data points is to reduce the download size 251 Large downloads will not be stopped even if the data files are 50 100 MB in size A large forecast data file takes a long time to download and may cause delays in the TECDIS system during operation B 1 4 2 Download Window KI 27 06 2012 19 54 12 Na LI DJ Download Estimated Size 15 kb Select Parameters Model Global ECMWF 150 km v Pressure 27 06 2012 01 00 00 30 06 2012 01 00 00 Global 1 5 degree model from ECMWF Vrye aa Bolger Temperature M Wind M Precipitation M Swell Waves M Total Waves S ving 3 Temp se Skye P aarmer 5G syhtoner Period l days gt Area Screen 143 sa deg Max 6400 Resolution fe hours 7 60 2257N 540 87 Select on Map 26 37 28E T Include Cyclones 53 33 45
271. ting this option it is possible to verify unofficial chart data if there is no ENC chart Non ENC dangers i coverage in the control area When this option is enabled the Route Check will trigger an alarm both from ENC and unofficial chart data 209 7 8 The AIS menu 7 8 1 Display filter Function Description Range Active Track Hide class B Relative course vector All AIS targets outside this specified range is filtered from the chart view Filters which AIS targets are shown as active based on the distance to own vessel This makes it possible to view all targets with course COG vector and past track line In INT 1 presentation mode the vessel name will also be shown To remove the distance limit and display all AIS targets select No limit Track specifies the length of the past track lines for the AIS targets It is specified in minutes of travel Removes the display of all class B targets from the chart view Sets all AIS target COG vectors to be relative to own vessel movement If not selected targets use true course for the COG vectors 7 8 2 Lost active targets AIS targets within the range specified in the Area field is marked with a black cross when the target data ends Chapter 7 System settings Setup Chart Ship Data log Safe Ais Display filter Range OONM 7 Track 3 min iv All targets active Hide class B T Relative COG vectors Lost ac
272. tinue to step 7 Hvis kilden vurderes som sikker kan du ga til neste punkt i denne prosedyren If this cannot be considered safe please contact your chart provider for further support D If confidence of authenticity is O you will not be able to load the charts Please contact you chart provider for support 148 Chapter 6 Chart installation and maintenance 7 Press the Show README txt button to read the release notes for the chart 8 Start the chart loading by pressing the LOAD CHARTS button If the Ignore S 57 Import Errors Warnings selection is marked chart loading will continue automatically independent of the S57 verification and error handling If any critical errors occur with a chart in the chart loading the chart will be discarded The chart loader window will tell you that any error messages are logged 9 If confidence of authenticity is below 6 a dialogue will now appear In it you have to confirm that you have performed a manual safety assessment of the chart source and that you want to continue Press the Yes button to continue installation Loading chart cell 2 of 2046 Estimated time remaining 7 hours 39 minutes ABORT Starting import of Primar BASE CD Issue WK49 07 4 cells have already been installed and have been skipped NO02A2820 000 Deerypting verifying compiling loaded with WARNINGS See Log NO02A2820 001 Decrypting verifying 10 The charts are now loaded and a
273. tion con er e tains timing control for Sher the Weather overlay Tipasse Markor info Sykloner 2 Data Enh Tidslinje Alarmer e the central area controls which weather parameters to display in the Weather overlay e the lower area is where you gain access to the various detail win dows for the weather overlay and its settings three main areas Note Weather overlay is displayed on the chart only when the chart scale is in the overview chart levels For chart scales with a level of detail less than 1 500 000 the weather overlay is hidden but the weather overlay window which controls the download and setup will be available B 1 5 1 Time management field The time management field includes several ways to verify the date and time of presentation of weather overlays on the chart 2537 B 1 5 2 14 10 2004 Displays the selected date Select or enter a specific date ni 08 00 00 Displays the selected time Select or enter a specific time Now Go to today s date and current time 44 p gt Moves three hours back or forward in time K Hi Moves one day back or forward in time Slider to look at weather data at a given time between the start and end time of the forecast While the sliding L controller is in focus indicated by a dotted rectangle around the slider the keyboard s arrow keys are used to move the time one hour forward or back The dates and times in the lower left and right
274. tion entry lane has to be selected in TECDIS Setup For this to be possible Allow route activation entry lane has to be selected in TECDIS Setup Is done by pressing the activate route button on the route planner toolbar Note If you have configured route activation with placing of additional waypoint creating a route leg from the vessel position to a user selectable place on the route you can from version 4 7 x 23 select any point on the route leg selecting existing waypoints Note that a new waypoint will be created in that position if there is not one there already You are not restricted to only 68 4 1 5 Automatic route generation with Jeppesen C Routes C Routes is distributed as an integrated part of the Jeppesen Profes sional chart database and is therefore only available on TECDIS units with Professional installed and activated In addition there has to be valid chart licenses for the entire area you intend to create routes in 4 1 5 1 About C Routes The C Routes automatic route generation tool includes functionality for automatic generation of route proposals to from a wide array of ports and user defined positions The system utilises a grid of predefined route legs all over the world and combines them in to one route for you Some sea areas and ports are not part of the grid contact Jeppesen if you exper ience that your desired port location is not available Lage ny rute med G Routes Ru
275. tive targets Dist limit 10 NM z I Alarm when lost Danger CPA all targets time distance 305 10NM M M Raise CPA alarm iv Show danger Cpa pos If Alarm when lost is enabled this will also provide an alarm 210 7 8 3 Danger CPA all Targets AIS targets which are within the range specified in the Distance field from own vessel future position and within a time frame specified in the Time field activate a Ship CPA alarm Raise CPA alarm is always selected and cannot be changed by the operator Contact a certified service technician to make this setting user changeable If Raise CPA alarm is off a warning message will be displayed continuously in the lower right corner of the chart view This mode can be used when navigating confined waters where the CPA alarm is triggered very often If Show danger CPA pos is selected the there are displayed continuously graphic symbols for y all dangerous AIS targets Hazardous targets j are shown on the chart regardless of AIS j ARPA functions settings and they appear in red until the danger situation is cleared When 2 Show Dangerous CPA pos is selected the CPA is continuously displayed with a small green circle on its course vector and with a little green square on a crossing vessel s heading vector If TECDIS loses the signal from a vessel that have an active CPA alarm a new alarm will be activated Lost CPA a dangerous vessel has disap
276. to open the menu tabs 2 Select the Chart menu Press the Layers button A new window appears In the dropdown list select 5 the chart database labeled S63 GB Check the box next to Admir alty Information Overlay to activate AlO Deactivate by unchecking the box ER M Hide ed Data Layers Im Tavet mananini Fi Log Safe Ais Log Safe Ais Admiralty Information Overlay CAIO Setup Chart Ship Data Layers Text generic v v Safe hazards M Shallow soundings v Deep soundings All depth contours Danger symbol Cables and pipes Bottom type v Lights character Lights cursor info Active lights Active lead sectors Small craft info 2 hs hei he FS s52 via H AP mode Offline Track Heading Manual chart corrections For more information about manual chart corrections see 6 3 3 Manual chart corrections see page 163 2 292 Appendix C Frequently asked questions C 5 How do I activate Tides 1 The Jeppesen Tides service requires that either JeppesenPRIMAR or Jeppesen Professional is nstalled and activated on your TECDIS unit Check this by opening the Setup menu and making sure that at least one of the chart databses is activated L DU NERO few of ees nme MT TT AE 2 Tidal stations are placed in a separate information l
277. tomatically are reflected to the other TECDIS unit The result is that the routing databases are identical on both TECDIS units Resultatet blir at rutedatabasene blir identiske pa begge TECDIS enhetene Activate automatic replication To enable Automatic Route Replication do the following 201 Chapter 7 System settings Verify that the requirements for this feature are met in accordance with the above list If there are routes on both TECDIS units choose on which TECDIS unit the routes should be preserved and on which TECDIS unit the routes will be deleted Insert service key on both TECDIS units and shut down the chart pro gram to return to Windows Auto replication of planned routes ROUTE REPLIGATION IMPORTANT AGTIVATION NOTE With 1 Make backup copy of all important routes Two TECDIS computers in network 2 See to that the route library is updated on Both accessing the other by IP Setup ONE TECDIS Replication activated on both TECDIS 3 Delete all routes on the OTHER TECDIS using this application All new routes and changes made on existing 4 Then activate replication on TECDIS with routes are automatically copied to the other ECDIS updated route library MUS ML ME IgE astra a te TESS ae afer Retain routes on this TEGDIS and activate replication Execute Run C Program Files TECDIS Replication exe on both TECDIS units On the TECDIS unit with the routes that sho
278. top the deletion 78 4 1 10 Voyage planner The Voyage planner button gives access to a voyage planner window with detailed information and settings for the selected route and all its waypoints M Endre WP lwp fec flat fon ist Kurs fart ffeit Radius Ror ankomst Stopp Tekst Keyboard Standard 22 58 58 994 N 010 90 972 E 0 2NM 180 0 10 0k 0 05NM 0 20NM_ 48 min_ Fart hoo Jog 5g se eta N 01030972E O3NM 195 1 100kn 005 ONM Amin Felt 0 05 24 58 58 500 N 010 30 808 E O 8NM 2128 10 0kn 0 05 NM 0 20 NM _ 48 min Rad ozo 2 2 58 58287N 00 BDABYE O2NM 2259 100kn 0 05 NM 020 NM gm 80 20 07 26 58 58 083 N 010 30 173 E O2NM 2889 10 0kn OOS NM O 20NM 48 min 80 20 08 fo ag 58 57974 N O10 29 822 E O 2NM 247 7 OO Kn 0 05 NM 120 NM 48 min 80 20 10 Sone 3 3 28 58 57 894 N 010 29 456 E O2NM 2641 OO Kn OO5NM 020 NM 48 min 80 20 1 i i When you press the voyage planner button you activate a table with detailed waypoint information This table is displayed in the lower part of the screen The following abbreviations are used in the waypoint table WP Waypoint number GC Great circle route leg Lat Waypoint latitude Lon Waypoint longitude Dist Distance to next waypoint Course Course to next waypoint Speed Planned speed Lane Lane corridor width Radius Turn radius ROT Rate Of Turn Arrival ETA to waypoint Dela
279. u 114 Other functions In this chapter we will look closer at other tools and functions TECDIS offers Her finner du blant annet kartinspektpren som er det mest alsidige verkt yet i TECDIS SEQUE CUISOR ss ESE GEE EG ER sob ess et GP en duet ES ED 117 5 1 1 The chart inspector window 117 5 1 2 Inspecting past tracks routes own symbols etc 117 5 2 Conning and anchor watch 2 2 eee eee 119 5 2 1 Conning display for mooring 119 5 2 2 Conning Anchorguard 22222222 cece aaao aaan anana 120 5 3 ARPA and radar targets O 122 5 4 AIS operation EE c eee EE EE 124 5 4 1 Displaying AIS information from other vessels 124 5 4 2 Displaying AIS information from own vessel _ 126 5 4 3 AlS Broadcast messages cece GEGEE Gee 127 5 4 4 AlS direct messaging to selected vessel _ 127 S4 5AIS target hst EE SE EE ne DE GR ER Se Ede 128 5 5 AlS vessel monitoring O 129 5 6 Tidal information SESSE GESE cece eee cece eee GE eee ees 130 OL el EE OO OE HERE OR OE ENG N ON 130 SOA LG AA rs gett hile nen Pome aha ote ete Ee ee ae 131 5 6 3 Tidal forecast points for ebb and flow _ 131 5 7 Dead Reckoning Mode EE aan aannannannannaanaanaann 132 58 ME Ul 2E ET LINO OE GE OR N RE aU OE N 133 5 8 1 Message types EES GE 133 5 8 2 Radio channels ESE c cece cece
280. ual actiation with placing of additional waypoint creating a route leg from the vessel pos ition to the first waypoint Is done by pressing the activate route button on the route planner toolbar 287 C 2 The quickest way to make a route quick route In TECDIS you can create and activate a route for sailing in only three steps 1 2 Start the Bearing tool from the main menu Move the cursor to the point in the chart where you want to place the second waypoint and left click the mouse Move the cursor to the point in the chart where you want to place the third and last waypoint and right click the mouse Press OK in the message box that appears The quick route is now drawn starting with waypoint 1 at the current position of own vessel The route is activated and route monitoring appears The quick route is a useful tool when you for example have to deviate from the planned voyage but still want the route to be checked and you want route monitoring 288 Appendix C Frequently asked questions C 3 How do I Keep my TECDIS units up to date Regular chart updates is normally a set task for most navigators What is often forgotten is to also keep the TECDIS software updated TECDIS software comes in a new version roughly 3 4 times a year By always keeping updated to the latest version you are getting access to the latest features and bug fixes TECDIS is updated by downloading TECDISupdate exe from
281. uld be retained select Retain routes on this TECDIS and activate replication and press the Execute button On the TECDIS device which routes should be removed select Delete ALL routes on this TECDIS and activate replication and press the Execute button Remove the service key from both TECDIS units and reboot the sys tems After both TECDIS units are again operational all the routes from the unit where the routes were kept will be automatically transfered to the other TECDIS unit All further route changes will automatically be reflected to the other TECDIS unit Disable Automatic Route Replication To disable Automatic Route Replication do the following 1 Insert service key on both TECDIS units and shut down the chart pro gram to return to Windows On both TECDIS units delete the C Program Files TECDIS SetRtRep licate Active txt file Remove the service key from both TECDIS units and reboot the sys tems 202 7 6 The Log menu 7 6 1 TECDIS stores data for position course and Setup Chart Ship Data speed of a vessel ARPA and AIS targets every Log Safa Ais minute History from a specified date can be displayed in several ways Log text 26 mai 2014 In the Date dropdown list you can select the 20min Hoon date for the log you want to review Details 20 min button opens a list of position course 12 hr ENG OR fix and speed for every twenty minutes for the
282. us and contact chart provider Only for dynamic licensing If it s been a long time since last update perform an online chart update and restart TECDIS Only for dynamic licensing The credit limit is about to be exceeded contact Jeppesen Marine to update your subscription Perform an online chart update and then restart TECDIS The physical network connection to another TECDIS device does not work Check the connection TECDIS receives too many AIS targets reduce the AIS area TECDIS receives too many AIS targets reduce the AIS area Risk of collision If CPA alarms are deactivated a warning is issued instead Other warning check the alarm list 105 Chapter 4 Navigation 4 5 5 Text messages Text message Description Refer to paper charts Unofficial chart is displayed Refer to paper charts The chart is not shown in S52 presentation or S52 presentation N AIS targets outside the specified range are not AIS range is limited l displayed Sleeping Ais class B Sleeping AIS class B targets are not displayed vessels are hidden No alarm raised for lost l Alarm for lost AIS target has been disabled close targets All time limited chart All time limited chart objects are displayed objects shown 106 4 6 Past track lines In TECDIS you can see your past track lines also Kjalvannslinje Track k towbar which displ Primer pos giver nown as a towbar which displays your voyage
283. utes 4 Navigational system of marks o Obstruction Obstruction Value of sounding lt unknown gt M Wreck Update Information Obstructions in general Administration area Named Information Test bolgebryter ia Caution area Author of update Ove Br then 12 Sounding Date of update 26 09 2011 11 50 30 3h Tnverana By clicking each single entry in the list you will view more information about that object in the right part of the window and the object is displayed with a red contour in the chart view 5 1 2 Inspecting past tracks routes own symbols etc The query cursor can also be used to inspect own objects added to the chart view for example 117 e past track lines e routes e own symbols e route recording e etc Mariner object SYMBOL id 20017 20 09 2013 09 04 aw 3 lalalalalalala 1 EE ea sal alm el else edel lalslel eel ile it o a enter Valse vel nfm se K Kartdata Bildefile eel lt took ep on rot ft up Dn Rot Sa eee When such objects are selected another window Mariner object will be displayed at the bottom of the screen Unlike the chart inspector values in this window can be manip ulated changed For example you can edit the text displayed in the chart view for a symbol you have added The text displayed in the chart view can contain up to 30 letters Added text can con
284. utton in the LOP tab between the bearings The Auto DR button is selectable when the Auto 2xLOP button is selected DR starts immediately when the two intersecting bearings are set out in chart view The Extended LOPs option extends the bearing lines to the outside of the visible map image regardless of scale The Move button allows you to parallel displace a bearing When the Move button is active the cursor placed over the anchor point for any of the original bearing line the one that is standing still and is made with thin line the end of the bearing line is marked with a circle and click the left mouse button The Mark EP button manually places an estimated position symbol in the chart After pressing the button the cursor is placed on the chart on the vessel s estimated position The EP symbol can now be placed in the chart by clicking the left mouse button The EP symbol is marked with the date of entry A window will pop up at the bottom of the screen so that the 113 Chapter 4 Navigation operator can enter text that is visible on the chart and complementing information that is displayed when viewed with the object inspector The EP symbol is stored in the system and can be deleted later using the symbol editor Select EP for DR is used to select one of the previously registered EP symbols as base for dead reckoning After pressing the button place the cursor on one of the previously mentioned EP marks on the chart a
285. vate add on functions do the following 1 Contact your Furuno Norway dealer to get an updated license code The license in your system will be reprogrammed when adding a feature so you have to report which other features you already have and want to keep The license code you receive is entered in the Password field Press the Program button to reprogram the license Press the OK button to exit the license tool Press the Show Edit license button again to check that the add on list is updated with the correct add ons SI a we A 6 2 Jeppesen licenses C Map License All functionality described in this chapter is valid for chart databases in the CM93 3 format distributed by Jeppesen C Map For chart databases in other formats S63 see chapter6 1 Installing chart databases see page 137 for more information A 6 2 1 Add license manually r C Map License System ID Databases Jel Telko 55003 ENG bf Add License manually Data Set or Area Name Get expired licenses E East Asia Hydrographic Commission EAHC N N Japan Hydrographic and Oceanographic Department JHOD Add Licenses from file Hydrographic Department Maritime and Port Authority MPA Singapore ji o censoorder License string Add License 1 The Add license manually button opens a field to the right where the license code issued by Jeppesen can be entered in the License String field 2 In the dropdown menu
286. vated See appendix A 6 Licences see page 235 This requires that an add on is a purchased b activated 2 299 2 The Weather Over lay button on the main toolbar is greyed out does not work AIS targets are dis played with MMSI number and not their names cannot place a MOB symbol in the chart don t have access to the Replay func tionality TECDIS has not Wait until the AIS transmitter on the targeted received the name vessel has sent the vessel name This will not of the vessel yet take long To place MOB symbols the vessel has to travel at a soeed lower than 0 5 knots The replay functionality requires that the vessel is not moving The vessel speed has to be lower than 0 5 knots 300 Appendix D Troubleshooting D 2Troubleshooting connection issues D 2 1General tests Check your subscription Make sure your subscription hasn t expired Try another connection method If you are using internet through the Furuno Network try downloading by email If you B are already using email try another email service If you now get access you have verified that the issue is with the network connection and not the TECDIS system or the service you are using Try to update the TECDIS software Telko AS provide you with free software updates for your TECDIS These contain both new functionality and big fixes The issue you are experiencing might have been corrected in an update Software updates are av
287. ve costs Dynamic licensing is a subscription agreement between the vessel operator and Jeppesen Marine which provides instant access to charts within the subscription limits Vessel operator doesn t supports any cost at the time of subscription to dynamic licensing However the vessel gets immediate access to all charts within the subscription restrictions for use of route planning or actual voyage without specifying any license codes Credit Limit To prevent uncontrolled license costs the subscription include an annual credit limit based on estimated annual costs for the vessel When a chart is used by TECDIS system the chart licensing cost is charged within the subscription and the remaining credit is reduced accordingly The credit limit can be extended if necessary Automatic Licensing When a new chart is needeed accordingly with the vessel s voyage TECDIS enables immediately a three month license for that chart If the vessel needs again the same chart after this period a new 3 month license active This means that a chart subscriptions is charged from the time the vessel actually need the chart with a 3 month license period Reporting user The active chart licenses are automatically reported back to Jeppesen Marine when Auto Updating or Semi Auto Updating functions in C MAP chart update option in the Setup menu is used to download chart updates for ENC or JeppesenPRIMAR charts So to update a chart is
288. ven The test button enables a connection to the IP server with the chosen address port number and in the field Received data on selected port the received data will be displayed The Baud TPA field In the Baud TPA field the data transfer speed for the selected active COM port is shown The speed is changed by selecting a different value in the dropdown list The NMEA standard is 4800 low speed but note that som sensors require different speeds The following speeds are available in the TECDIS system e 4800 e 9600 2212 A 3 1 5 A 3 1 6 A 3 1 7 e 19200 e 38400 AIS generally use NMEA high speed 38400 baud Marker AIS i datafeltet og sjekk at Baud TPA feltet angir 38400 baud Serial port activity In the serial port activity field all data from the selected serial port is displayed A serial port receiving data will blink with green color The indicators are for COM ports 1 12 in increasing order from left to right Received data on selected port In the Received data on selected port field the data that are being received from the COM port that is marked with blue in the sensor table If received data is valid NMEA sentences the line will flash in green If IP ports are used data for all sensors attached to that port are shown The sensors will then all flash green when valid When changing to another COM port the data displayed will change and the data for that port will be shown Other COM por
289. vice Key in an available usb port 2 Start the TECDIS unit 3 You will now be prompted to remove the Service Key to start the TECDIS unit the regular way Select cancel which allows you to start the unit without starting the TECDIS program TECDIS You now have access to Windows desktop and the programs TECDIS Setup S63 Chart Loader and NMEA Server A 2 2 Entering service mode when TECDIS is running 1 Enter a TECDIS Service Key in the TECDIS unit 2 Wait until the text label Servicemode appears in the Servicemode lower right corner of the chart view 3 Turn off TECDIS as normal by pressing the STOP button in the top left corner of the screen oe This exits the TECDIS program without turning of the computer You now have access to Windows desktop and the programs TECDIS Setup S63 Chart Loader and NMEA Server 218 Appendix A TECDIS Setup A 3 NMEA Data The NMEA Data tab in TECDIS Setup contains all controls and config urations for input and output in the TECDIS system TEGDIS TELchart EGS Setup local Ip 1192_168_0_2331 w xi Sseosscssorsversnsenconsonncsnesesssed 192 168 0 283 2001 GPS1 COG SOG 2 VIR GPS2 Sentence and port select Heading HDT P2 192 168 0 288 2001 Gyro pia more Heading2 HDT P2 1824680238 2001 Als Water speed VHW IP2 1924660288 2001 Log gt TOP Radar arpat TIM P2 192168028 2001 Radar 1 psa lpz He ypp 22 168 0 283 por
290. view chart scale and the A G scales on the main toolbar e Licensed charts are outlined with a e Unlicensed charts are outlined with a The name of the chart is displayed in the bottom left corner of its rectangle 179 6 6 1 Importing S57 data Note When two TECDIS units are connected make sure both units are updated simultaneously An S 57 database consists of datasets chart sheets ENC data is sold as ENC cells in 557 format and when these are imported to a database each ENC cell is converted to a dataset This process involves two steps 1 Verification validity check 2 Compilation convert ENC cell to dataset Import of s57 data is done in the chart library Use the following procedure 1 Select chart database in the dropdown list 2 Click the Import 557 button A folder structure is displayed 3 Select the drive you want to collect data from in the Import S57 data from field Data is imported to a database named with the prefix S57 e If no S57 database exist a new one Enter a name for the new Database is automatically made Create a 957 new s57 database manually by click Cancel ing the Create new Database but ton You can now enter a name for the new base e The S57 database will automatically be added and selected for display in the Setup menu 4 When the drive containing the data is selected the Start button becomes available Click the Start button to initiate import T
291. vs Weather overlay is also integrated with the route system which provides manual weather routing and custom voyage meteorograms Note that a three month demonstration subscription to weather overlays are available for all systems running TECDIS software version 4 7 1 X or 4 7 2 X To activate this subscription please contact Jeppesen Marine and enter the System ID TELKO eT number A configuration code must also be obtained from TELKO AS or Furuno Norway 246 Appendix B Optional add ons B 1 1 How to enable weather overlay To activate weather overlays 1 A License code TECDIS option must be added to the System ID TELKO eT license key 2 A Weather Service subscription from Jeppesen Marine must be enabled 7 9 2 1 Activating the license To find out if eToken license key has this option enabled do the following Start TECDIS Setup Go to the Licensing tab Then press the Show edit license button and wait until the fields are updated The Codeplug field shows the correct number and the eToken field to the right of this has the options listed with the activated blue color If the field Weather display and routing is not shown in blue take a screen capture print screen Save this picture with the filename eTxxxxx png where xxxxx represents the System ID TELKO eTnumber Send this file as an attachment to an email to an authorized TECDIS dealer or support telko no When the system has ap
292. w big the deviation in degrees between primary and secondary heading sensor has to be before an alarm is generated Hvis de to headingsensorene avviker mer enn denne verdien genererer TECDIS en alarm Alarm limit difference primary and secondary position x 0 01 NM specifies how big the difference in position between primary and secondary position sensors has to be before an alarm is generated The value is expressed in hundredths of a nautical mile Hvis avstanden mellom posisjonene fra de to posisjonssensorene avviker mer enn denne verdien genererer TECDIS en alarm 241 This blank page is automatically inserted where appropriate to ensure that new Chapters begin on a recto page oe Fi Pan hy a L Fa Eeu i TASA paga i ce rd gb Fi KRAAM In this chapter we will look closer at the optional add ons available for your TECDIS system See how you can improve navigational security and voyage financials through these powerful add ons for your TECDIS system B 1Weather overlay ss EE ME SE ct EE GO ED de EG 246 B 1 1How to enable weather overlay 247 B 1 2How to download the Weather Service subscription 248 B 1 3Control of weather subscription licenses 251 B 1 4Downloading a new weather forecast 251 B 1 5Controlling the Weather overlay on the chart _ 253 B 1 6E UStom VIEWS is EE TED EE GE e ER ED AG EA ER GE GES 255 B 1 7EUFSOF INO Re Sa RS AE c
293. work Vessel settings Specification see page 227 Here you set the vessel size and sensor placement The only setting the user should set is Allow route activation entry lane All other settings are to be set by certified service technicians only Chart installation Misc see page 232 From this tab you can maintain your chart database if you use charts from Jeppesen Here you also check the monitor calibration status Licences see page 235 From this tab you can administrate your licenses both for charts and purchased add ons TECDIS Note that only Jeppesen chart licenses are administrated from this tab Licenses for other chart providers are administered from the S63 Chart Loader program Track Control Settings see page 239 If the TECDIS unit is configured with Track Control this tab is used to set the autopilot specific settings 217 A 2 Service mode To gain access to TECDIS Setup a TECDIS Service Key has to be used This is a custom made USB dongle that comes with the TECDIS unit We recommend that the TECDIS Service Key is stored in a safe place as changes in TECDIS setup are only to be executed by certified technicians Each TECDIS unit comes with a Service Key and a backup Service Key CD It is the captains responsibility that the Service Key is used only when necessary A 2 1 Entering service mode during system startup 1 Before you turn on the TECDIS unit insert the TECDIS Ser
294. y Stop time at waypoint min Text Waypoint name and additional information NB When the Route Planner is in edit waypoint mode the route monitoring function is turned off the route control signals will not be generated to the autopilot NB By clicking one of the data fields in the list belonging to a waypoint that is not displayed the chart will center at the specified waypoint This feature is disabled if the Auto Chart Reposition is enabled 79 Chapter 4 Navigation 4 1 10 1 Changing values in the waypoint list Default values Endrawp Default vaules for speed corridor width and ROT can be specified in the standard Default fie d to the left of the waypoint list The values listed here is used Fart 10 0 for the entire route except for those waypoints where you have locked a Felt 0 05 custom value Custom values are viewed in black Rad 0 20 Lane M Info To quickly change custom values back to default values right click them and they will be unlocked and available for default changing To lock a value right click that value agian This only applies to custom values default values will be changed Below these default values there are three parameters that can be set re With this activated the specified lane corridor width will be dis played in the chart With this activated both planned speed and course will be dis Info played for each routeleg in the chart This option is d
295. you use charts from one of the following providers a rapid install ation procedure is available e Jeppesen chapter 6 1 1 see page 137 e Navtor Navstick chapter 6 1 2 see page 139 e Nautisk Forlag Neptune chapter 6 1 3 see page 141 Encrypted charts are delivered by chart providers on one or more CD DVD ROM alternatively on USB sticks The chart loading process uses Cell Permits to decrypt chart cells confirm their contents against the S57 standard and compile them to SENC format CM93 3 which is used by TECDIS to display the charts Before you begin acquire Cell Permits Installation of chart with S63 Chart Loader requires Cell Permits for licensing Cell Permits are received from your chart provider For your chart provider to give you correct cell Permits you have to prepare and send your unique User Permit to your provider The procedure for preparing and sending User Permits can be found in the cha6 1 4 Create the User Permit file see page 143 crate user permit 6 1 5 1 Adding Cell Permits The procedure is as follows 1 Insert a TECDIS Service Key in an available usb port in the TECDIS unit 2 Wait until the Service mode label appears in the bottom right corner of the chart view and then you exit the TECDIS program 145 Sri 10 11 12 Insert CD DVD usb dongle with the desired chart database into the TECDIS unit Start the S63 Chart Loader program Go to the Licenses t
296. ype 60 Passenger ship F a Status Under way using engine displayed in the chart view by checking the Destination SFU NOJ STRISWE OO CPA box ETA 13 01 14 30 Hzd cargo L124 B 19 D 5 4m Ship size 125 5 4 2 Past track can be saved by pressing the Store button or deleted by pressing the Delete button The Message button gives access to AIS message log for the selected target and allows sending of new messages to the vessel The AIS button expands the information window so that it now also shows details such as destination status vessel type etc The AIS target window can be removed form the chart view by pressing the OK button Displaying AIS information from own vessel Access to own vessel AIS information is gained by clicking own vessel in the chart view This brings up Own Ship AIS data with some minor differences from the AIS target window In sted of the buttons for activation CPA and past track alternatives the text Own Ship AIS data is visible In addition information such as e Status e Type e Destination e ETA e Hzd cargo e Draught e Persons can be changed by pressing the Change button To change information simply write in the Eget skip Als data SY Elefteria BRG 14607 Pos 69 00 530 N DIST TLINM 010 50 559 E COG 2770 CPA 3 93 NM S06 16 2kn ICPA 29 8 min Own ship AIS data End Melding AIS ak Type 96 Sailing

TECDIS Manual EN rev 3_23

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents